Home

Antares SB-GSM User`s Manual [FW5.30]

1. Speed limit for START STOP detection gt 5GS0310080 lt Start 2 minutes timer gt SED38SV0 S03 ACT SGCO01TCO00120 lt Stop the time gt SED39SVO SO3 ACT SGCO1U lt Create the STOP report gt SEDSONV4 CO1 lt Create the START report gt SED31NV4 SO03C01 amp lt Safe engine turn off Set the speed limit for the time speed condition gt GS0110150 lt Start 16 seconds timer when the speed falls off the previously set value and as long as the user signal is set gt SED145V0 501 U00 amp ACT SGCO2TCO0016 lt Stop the timer when the speed condition is violated gt SED15SVO 501 ACT SGCO2U lt Ignition cut event Sets output 4 high and sends a report to DA 5 gt SED13NV5 CO2U00 amp ACT SSSXP41 lt 156 5 10 RECONNECTION EVENT FOR TCP Restore set low the user signal gt SED165V0 E13 ACT SSSU000 lt end 5 10 Reconnection event for TCP 5 10 1 Script Depending on how the AVL server works a TCP reconnection event may be required As presented on the Operation chapter Antares SB works as TCP client always opening a TCP connection with the server even if it has nothing to report With this characteristic the unit can be interrogated at any time The pitfall of this mechanism is that it may happen that the AVL server does not know from which unit the new incoming connection is A solution would have been having the server to se
2. the Keep Alive is not active CY 219 z O 6 34 XADM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE For example to query send gt QXADMO lt The unit responds gt RXADM0053090310007320F000 lt Wwhen using 1 as Diagnostic level gt QXADMi lt The unit responds gt RXADM10530B690310008320F0001515000 lt 220 6 35 XADP DESTINATION POINTS 6 35 XADP Destination Points Qualifiers Q S R This message configures both IP type and Telephone destinations 6 35 1 IP type destinations For IP type destination i e Destination Points 00 to 09 use the following format and table AABCD DDD E EEE Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Destination AA 00 09 IP Type destination point Point index 1 Console access B Access flag Action or Delete action U Delete the Destination Point 0 The IP type host has TAIP console ac cess 1 The IP type host has no TAIP console access Error 8 is returned on every mes sage Other values work but are reserved for future implementations The user should not use any value different than 0 1 and U 1 TCP UDP C flag TCP UDP and UDP ack UDP no ack selection selection Oori This DP works on TCP 2 UDP without confirmation 3 UDP with confirmation variable IP host D D 1 50 IP address or name of the IP host Use the stan chars dard dot separated numbers names for hosts Ex 192 168 0 1 or avl server
3. koei 64 3 10 Remote host software o 64 3 10 1 Working with TCP 65 3 10 2 Working with UDP 66 3 10 3 Working with SMS 67 3 11 Reports messages 2 0 2 20 eee eee 68 3 11 1 Events Reporting Messages 68 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 11 2 Responses to TAIP Commands Messages 69 Reports buffer 2 2 a eee 70 GPS Back Loe 4 jae eae be e Bi oe ee 71 Virtual Odometer o e 71 Authentication Mechanism 71 Contents 3 16 SMS Alias 2 e e 3 17 SMS Messages Gateway o 3 18 Garmin Devices Suppport 3 18 1 Setting up Antares O ars 3 18 2 Data Flow Example 3 18 3 Setting Up The Server 3 19 ORBCOMM Satellite Modems Support 3 19 1 Setting up Antares SB for ORBCOMM Satel lite Modems 0 3 19 2 Operation oaao 200004 3 19 3 Example pocs ers e Re Re ee ee 3 20 OBD Support 2 200004 3 21 Firmware Upgrade o e 3 21 1 Over The lr o 3 21 2 Upgrading locally 3 22 TAIP Downloader Tool Write Read scripts 3 22 1 Communicating locally with the Antares SB 3 22 2 STEP 1 Selecting a COM port 3 22 3 STEP 2 Test Communication 3 22 4 Write a Configuration Script 3 22 5 Read a Configuration
4. Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Hour AA decimal 2 Minutes BB decimal 5 Seconds CC DDD 2 Day EE decimal 2 Month FF decimal 4 Year GGGG decimal 2 GPS UTC Time HH seconds Offset 1 Fix Mode F Value O 2D GPS 1 3D GPS 2 2D DGPS 3 3D DGPS 6 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 No fix available 2 Number of usable JJ satellites 1 GPS UTC Offset K Flag flag O Invalid 1 Valid 5 Reserved LLLLL 203 6 25 TD TIME AND DISTANCE SIGNALS CONFIGURATION 6 25 TD Time and Distance signals configuration Qualifiers Q S R Time and Distance criteria Note The Time and Distance signals are set by its corresponding Time and Distance counter which is a counter that follows a Time and Distance criteria This criteria allows to create a counter that does not follow a time or distance criteria inde pendantely from each other instead combines these two variables to generate an intelligent trigger to be used for a more efficient vehicle tracking These signals are immediately reset by the processor after being evaluated in order to allow future triggers The main purpose of this counter is to control the reporting frequency according to the vehicle s displacement So that the unit increases the report frequency when the vehicle is moving accumulating traveled distance and decreases it when the vehicle is not moving This is more efficient than having the unit report by a time only criteria were alm
5. 301 10 11 2 Using a Time And Distance counter 301 10 12Creating an event o o e e 301 10 13Creating a turn by turn heading change report 301 10 14Creating a kilometer counter 302 10 15Setting an output o o o 302 10 16Querying the state of an input 302 10 17Querying the state of the vehicle ignition input 302 10 18Querying the Analog to digital converter 302 10 19Querying the Internal back up battery level 303 10 20Driving the unit to sleep power mode 303 10 21Querying the firmware version 303 10 22Activating PAD mode on serial port 303 18 6 6lC Preface 0 1 Scope 0 2 Organization This document is the Antares SB User s Guide On this document you will find information on what is the Antares SB its features specifications installation instructions and explanation on the unit s configuration and operation This document is available at http www digitalcomtech com Refer to this site or to your Digital Communications Technologies contact for the latest version of this document Most of the technical information related to the Antares SB device is expected to be written on this manual However there are some external documents called Application Notes which contains some specific development that falls beyond the scope of this document This manual is intended to be used
6. format ATAAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1to10 Vehicle ID A AAA string Identification code assigned to the vehicle This parameter may be alpha numeric The only forbidden characters are lt gt and The factory default is 0000 191 e G 6 15 MS MEMORY SESSION 6 15 MS Memory Session Qualifiers S R This message is deprecated and has no effect on the unit 192 6 16 MT MDT MODE 6 16 MT MDT Mode Qualifiers Q S R This message controls and starts the serial ports MDT communication mode The message has the following format A BBB CCCD EE FF GG HH ROUTE 1 Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Mode A flag MDT mode N Normal default P PAD R ORBCOMM satellite modems O OBD Mode H Full Binary 3 Timeout BBB seconds Packet timeout PAD mode 3 Max CCC Packet max size PAD mode Length Default is 50 max is 50 1 Include D flag Include packet delimiter PAD packet mode delimiter T Include F Exclude 3 Packet EE hex value Code for the character that is to be delimiter used as delimiter 1 PAD mode 1 Default is 0D 3 Packet FF hex value Code for the character that is to be delimiter used as delimiter 2 PAD mode 2 Default is 0A 3 PAD GG hex value Code for the character that is to mode be used to end PAD mode and go escape back to N
7. bitO Input 1 1 AcTIVE 0 INACTIVE bitl Input 2 bit2 Input 3 bit3 Input 4 See the Configuration chapter for information on how vehicle s acceleration is measured 177 yq 6 8 EV EVENT MESSAGE Tag Meaning NS ABCCDE GSM GPRS Network Status A Sim Card State Same as the SIM state field of the XADM message B GSM Registration Status Same as the GSM Status field of the XADM message C Received signal strength Same as the RSSI field of the RP message D GPRS Attached flag E GPRS session state Same as the GPRS state field of the XADM message SV AA A GPS satellites in view OE AAAAA Instantaneous Engine s RPM OBD Related OT AAA Instantaneous Throttle 0 100 OBD Related OF AAA Fuel Level 0 100 OBD Related OG AAAAA Remaining fuel gallons OBD Related OR AAA Instantaneous Fuel Rate 000 to 029 gallons per hour OBD Re lated OS AA OBD Status This is a HEX value that must be converted to Binary where each bit represents a flag The flags from the Least Significat Bit to the Most Significant Bit are eSignalState True if the OBD is communicating with Antares SB eChecksumbError True if a checksum error was detected elgnition True if the vehicle s engine is on eMIL True if the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is on eSecondaryTool True if a secondary OBD tool is con nected OD AAA Vehicle s Odometer in miles
8. 4 24 Cell ID reporting ext EV method 4 24 CELL ID REPORTING Antares SB can add the Cellular Network Cell ID information on every reported message This enables a Tracking System to locate the unit when GPS is not available Antares SB will report the Cell ID LAC MCC MNC and RSSI of the cell it is registered with This information can be used by systems that know the location of Cells to approximate a location of an unit with no GPS There are two methods for making the unit report Cell ID information 1 Use the extended EV tags CE or CF 2 Use QXACE as an user action on an event definition The first method is preferred as Cell ID information is attached to GPS information giving a clearer situation of the unit when the report generated For information on extended EV tags see the Reports messages section on the Operation chapter the Scenarios and Examples chapter and the XAEF and ED messages The extended EV tag CF gives information about the actual Cell s e MCC Mobile Country Code 3 digits e MNC Mobile Network Code 3 digits e LAC Local Area Code Cells are grouped by an operator in a Lo cation Area group which is identified by this number between 0 and 65535 Represented in HEX 0000 FFFF e Cell ID Cell Identity Number between 0 and 65535 Represented in HEX 0000 FFFF e RSSI Received signal strength indicator Number between 0 and 63 17 The extended EV tag CE gives informa
9. S Q R 6 56 XANB NETWORK BAND MODE Antares SB is capable of working on 4 different cellular bands in the following way With this command the user selects a mode which may be of mono band On dual band modes bands are automatically switched by the module according to network discovery information A mode change will be effective only after a system reset gt SRT lt or power cycle The allowed modes are presented in the next table The message has the following format or dual band type Chars Item Format Value Meaning mode A 0 6 Band mode 0 SS mono band mode 850 MHz mono band mode 900 extended MHz 900E mono band mode 1800 MHz mono band mode 1900 MHz dual band mode 850 1900 MHz dual band mode 900E extended 1800 MHz dual band mode 900E extended 1900 MHz 255 Y 6 57 XANS NETWORK STATUS GPRS 6 57 XANS Network Status GPRS Qualifiers Q R Use this message to consult the state of the GPRS session and the state of the TCP sockets of every IP type Destination Point The message has the following format ABB CDEEE x 10 Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 GPRS Attach A flag GPRS Attach state state 0 De attached 1 Attached 2 GPRS state BB 00 99 GPRS state 00 Initializing 02 Stack ready 04 Dialing 06 Connected 07 APN not set by user 08 Stopped 0
10. S R To change the status of a Stop Message present in the Garmin device s Stop Message List use the CS modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 This message has the following format DoT 237 6 42 10 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAAB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Stop ID AAA 0 255 ID used to identify the Stop Message to be modified 1 Status B 1 3 The status in which the Stop Mes sage will be set 1 Mark Stop as Done 2 Mark Stop as Active This state indicates that the Garmin device will begin tracing the route to the Stop destination 3 Delete the Stop For example to set a Stop as active send gt SXAGMCS0002 lt Antares will respond to confirm that the command was received like this gt RXAGMCS0002 lt Antares will also send an unsolicited message indicating that the status of the Stop was changed gt RTXGMSS000100000 lt XAGMTS Garmin Mode Text Send Qualifiers S R To send Text Messages from the server to the Garmin device use the TS modifier This message uses the following format 238 Y 6 42 11 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAAAABCCCCCCCCCC DDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning Message ID AAAAA 00000 This is a 5 digit integer that identi 99999 fies each message sent to the Garmin device Each message must have a different ID If
11. When the user touches this icon it will show the Stop Messages list on the Garmin device My Stops Package pickup st Garmin 63 77 W URGENT Pick up Mr Lee befor 1 37 SE Ship with cargo number 57820 677 H Collect refrigerator ask for Mr o N Back Delete All Then when the user selects the new Stop Message from the Stop Message list Antares will send an unsolicited message to the server indicating this action gt RTXGMSS000103000 lt If the user chooses to follow this Stop destination Antares will confirm that the stop message was set as active with the an unsolicited message gt RTXGMSS000100000 lt Or if the user deletes the message Antares will send the unsolicited message to confirm this action gt RTXGMSS000104 lt Please refer to the XAGM TAIP message for more information on the config uration of the Garmin device with Antares SB DCT 78 zz G 3 19 ORBCOMM SATELLITE MODEMS SUPPORT 3 18 3 Setting Up The Server The server that will send and receive the messages from and to Antares SB when using the Garmin device must be configured to receive unex pected messages asynchronous communication Meaning that it must re ceive and processes cone the status messages and text messages sent at anytime by Antares SB 3 19 ORBCOMM Satellite Modems Support Use Orbcomm System satellite modems as a backup to send event reports when a GPRS IP destination is unreachable The destination
12. AUTHORIZED PARTNER digitalcomtech com O Digital Communications Technologies LLC is a Garmin authorized partner Founded in 1989 Garmin is a pioneer in Global Positioning System GPS devices and the worldwide leader in the design manufacture and sale of GPS equipment The company has built and sold millions of GPS products that serve the automotive aviation marine consumer wireless OEM and general recre ation markets For more information visit http www8 garmin com solutions pnd partners jsp LIMITED WARRANTY Digital Communications Technologies warrants the original purchaser that for a period of twelve 12 months from the date of purchase the product shall be free of defects in materials and work manship under normal use During the warranty period Digital Communications Technologies shall at its option repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its facil ities at no charge for labor and materials Any replacement and or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety 90 days whichever is longer The original owner must promptly notify Digital Communications Technologies in writing that there is defect in material or workman ship Such written notice must be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period International Warranty The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within the United States with the exception
13. If the message was received by the Garmin device Antares will respond to the server gt RXAGMTS0000001244751579Hello World lt If there is a communications problem and the Garmin device does not receive the message Antares will respond with Error 46 Internal communications problem The Garmin device will display a floating icon indicating that a message has arrived WA Foreland ar ML 9 00 ANTES GARMIN n vi When the user presses the icon the inbox will be open showing all the messages present in the Garmin device Can you bring new tank to je 709 Ga Stop by warehouse at 4 PM HJPick up new tank at office Then the user will touch the new message in the list and the message will be shown 75 P 3 18 GARMIN DEVICES SUPPPORT Bring New Tank At the same time Antares will send a status message to the server indicating that the message was read gt RTXGMTSO00001 lt If the user decides to delete the message Antares will send a message indi cating this action gt RTXGMTS000002 lt To send a message using the Garmin device the user simply needs to type in a message using the Create Message option l1l2f3f 4 5fc6l7fsfofo Back Mode Done When the user finishes typing the message and touches the Done option the message will be stored in the outbox and Antares will send the message to the server in a format like this gt RTXGMTRO0000001170936526626Hello Server
14. 10 8 Configuring a telephone number for SMS and Voice interaction To set set the number 9123456789 on Destination Point 10 for SMS and Voice interaction send gt SXADP10109123456789 lt 10 9 Querying hosts ports and telephones To get a list of hosts ports with working protocol TCP UDP mode ACK no ACK and telephones as well as authorization flags for each host and telephone send gt QXADP lt DoT 300 PQ G 10 10 GROUPING AVL SERVERS ON DAS 10 10 Grouping AVL servers on DAs To make Destination Address DA 4 represent only host address Destination Point 00 send gt 5SDA4 P00 lt To make Destination Address DA 4 represent Destination Point 00 and unit s Serial Port send gt SDA4 P00 P15 lt To delete DA 4 grouping send gt SDA4U lt 10 11 Defining a periodic timer There are two alternatives to achieve a periodic timer 10 11 1 Using a time counter To create a 5 minutes 300 seconds periodic counter signal C08 send gt SGCO8TRO0300 lt or alternatively use a counter delta of 60 seconds gt SGCO8TROOO0500060 lt With the same result 10 11 2 Using a Time And Distance counter To create a 5 minutes 300 seconds periodic TD signal TD4 send gt STD40300 lt 10 12 Creating an event To define event 33 to trigger with the periodic signal C08 defined on the previous section gt SED33XV0 CO8 lt The letter X on the command indicates to generate event report
15. 2 region index AA 00 99 Circular Region index to be set with the actual GPS position having the radius given in B 6 radius BBBBBB meters Region s radius For example to create a circular region on index 34 centered at the actual posi tion and having a radius of 1km send gt SXAIR34001000 lt This region can be monitored with the region signal K34 See the Using Circular Regions section of the Configuration chapter for more examples 249 z G 6 51 XAIT DRIVING METRICS 6 51 XAIT Driving Metrics Qualifiers S Q R Use this message to consult the actual vehicle s acceleration maximum registered positive acceleration maximum registered negative breaking acceleration and maximum registered speed This command allows to consult also the GPS situa tion of the vehicle when each maximum occurred Driving Metrics are discussed in the Configuration chapter The message has the following formats depending on the value used for the Action Response item A BBBCCCDDD EEE FFFFF GGG HHH Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action Response A R C Action Response type R Summary Response to driving metrics sum mary C Clear Clear maximums and their GPS data 3 Actual acc BBB 99 99 Actual acceleration in Miles h s 3 Max Pacc CCC 99 99 Max positive acceleration in Miles h s 3 Max Nacc DDD 99 99 Max negative acceleration in Mile
16. 4 28 2 Reading Scripts Creating an script is not different than giving the configuration commands manually to the unit Create a new empty file on any low level text editor like Windows notepad Start adding a new line for each configuration message when fin ish save the file as a tmf file Note for notepad users Notepad won t let you save the file with an ex tension different to txt to be able to save it with the tmf extension make sure that on the Type box of the Save as dialog All files is selected then enter a name followed by tmf Now the tmf file you just created can be passed to an unit using the TAIP Downloader software see the Writing Scripts section for this If you prefer you can edit an existing script instead of creating a new one from scratch Another option for not having to create an script from scratch is making TAIP Downloader generate an script file by reading an Antares SB See the next section You can read an Antares SB s configuration and save it on a tmf file with the TAIP Downloader software This is useful to read edit or duplicate i e copy the configuration to other units a unit s configuration Follow the instructions on the TAIP Downloader Tool section of the Op eration chapter and have TAIP Downloader already connected and com municating with Antares SB before proceeding 19 Do not use high level editors like word processors as they will add confusing no plain text ch
17. When the vehicle falls below this speed we will start a counter of 60 sec onds to prevent that the Start Stop Conditions are triggered by quick speed changes gt SED10SV0 S05 ACT SGCO5TCO0060 lt When the 60 second counter is complete the Stop condition is met and we will set User Signal 05 to false which we will use later on gt SED11SV0 C05 ACT SSSU050 lt The Start Condition will be met when the vehicle goes over the speed limit after a Stop Condition We will then set User Signal 05 to true gt SED12S5V0 S05C05 amp ACT SSSU051 lt Now that we have our Start Stop Conditions set we must create a condition that determines whether the IP destination is reachable and when it is un reachable To do so we ll use the A00 signal When Signal A00 transitions to false it means that the connection to the destination point 00 our AVL server in this case was lost only true on TCP To prevent that too many messages are sent to the satellite modem due to quick socket connection losses we will use a 10 minute counter that will remain true while the A00 is false to determine that the IP destination is in fact unreachable The A00 will also transition to false if the unit is having problems with GPRS gt SED135VO A00 ACT SGCOOTCO001000060 lt When the 10 minute timer is completed we will set User Signal 00 to false gt SED145V0 C00 ACT SSSU000 lt When Signal A00 transitions to true it mean that the connection to
18. 276 y 6 75 XATS TAIP CONSOLE SNIFFER 6 75 XATS TAIP Console Sniffer Qualifiers S R Use this message to activate deactivate the debugging tool that throws to the serial port all of the TAIP console messages exchanged over any communication media This is useful to check the communication between an IP host software or Telephone and the unit When active the unit sends any incoming outgoing TAIP message to the se rial port preceded by a XATS response with a direction of message indicator I for Ingoing O for Outgoing the direction character is followed by a dash and a number indicating the channel on which the message was sent received The message has the following format A BB B Ccc Chars Item Format Value Meaning Action Direc tion indicator A flag When using the s qualifier Use 1 to activate the sniff 0 to deactivate For R responses Il indicates that the following dis played message was an incomming message O indi cates an outgoing message A indicates that the mes sage is a valid UDP ACK a indicates that the message was recived via UDP but was not recognized 3 or 2 Channel BB B Communication channel 000 to 014 indicate Destina tion Points 00 to 14 respectively 255 Indicates serial port and 254 indicates an internal messaged caused by an event action If an ACK was received via the UDP network while in C
19. AAA 000 255 ID used to identify the Stop Message sent to the Garmin device 10 Time BBBBBBBBBB 0 4294967295 This will be the Time and Date shown in the message Is the number of sec onds since 12 00 am December 31 1989 UTC A value of 4294967295 HEX OxFFFFFFFF represents an invalid time and the Garmin device will ignore the time and date The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 11 Latitude CCCCCCCCCCC 0 1073741824 Indicates latitude in semicircles North latitudes are indicated with positive numbers South latitudes are indicated with negative numbers The first character indicates sign 11 Longitude DDDDDDDDDDD 0 2147483648 Indicates longitude in semicircles East longitudes are indicated with positive numbers West longitudes are indicated with negative numbers The first character indicates sign 1 40 Text Message E EEE Varies This text indicates the name given to the Stop destination lt can con tain any set of ASCII characters The messages can be from 1 to 40 char acters long When using the Q qualifier to consult the status of a Stop Message use the following format 236 Y 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAABBBCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Stop ID AAA 000 255 ID used to identify the Stop Message to be con sulted
20. DIGITAL uD COMMUNICATIONS E TECHNOLOGIES 2 Mi ANTARES SB Manual For firmware version 5 30 GSM version SENSO SEMS 1800 1900 Mhz Antares SB GSM User s Manual FW 5 30 Digital Communications Technologies September 9 2009 Copyright This manual is copyrighted All type of reproduction of its content must be authorized by Digital gt TM Communications Technologies Document information Version 1 00 Type Release Date of release 08 09 09 History Version Comments 5 30 1 00 08 09 09 First release for Antares FW 5 30 Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in Added in ES on Garmin Devices Support on ORBCOMM Satellite Modems Support on OBD Support on SMS Alias on SMS Gateway on Virtual Odometer on Authentication Mechanism on Event Machine on Event Definition on Event Message on Reset message on TAIP Console on Regions Report on Store amp Forward Thresholds on MDT Mode on Driving Metrics on Reporting Mode on Diagnostic Message Added info on Silent Actions Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed info Changed i
21. unit The Fleet Manage ment Protocol is composed of several internal protocols shown in the table below which could be implemented or not depending on the model of the Garmin device The protocols that are necessary to work with Antares SB implemented functionality are Implemented Functionality A602 A603 A604 Send text messages to Garmin X X Receive text messages from Garmin X xX Consult the state of a message previously sent to Garmin X Read Unread Deleted This state is reported either on request or unsolicited Set canned messages for quick replies X Delete canned messages X Send Stop Messages to Garmin Destination Messages X Consult the state of a Stop Message previously sent to Garmin X Active Inactive Done Deleted This state is reported either on request or unsolicited Delete a Stop Message previously sent to Garmin X Driver ID X Driver Status X Canned Replies X Fleet Managment Protocol data deletion X If a functionality has more that one X mark it means that a Garmin de vice must have at least one of these protocols so Antares SB can use the functionality If the Garmin device has more than one of these protocols Antares SB will use the most recent one Most of the newer Garmin de vices have all three internal protocols implemented For more information about the protocols supported by each Garmin device model please co
22. 1 1 14 1 1 15 1 1 16 1 1 17 1 1 18 1 1 19 1 1 20 Analog to Digital Converter Discrete Inputs and Outputs Optional Back up Battery VOICE SUPPOFt me tac eee APES aS SMS support 0 TCP and UDP support Over the air control consult Over the air upgrade Versatile RS 232 communication Communication buffer Automatic outputs control DNS lookup eh seas Ge ee de Turn by turn report Driving metrics 20040 GPS Back Log and Acceleration IMELas 1D 5 fete a ee ge Ee Cell ID reporting Molex type connectors SMA Reverse polarity GPS antenna connector Event Reporting Contents 1 2 Contents of package 4 26 1 3 Front side description o a 27 1 331 RS 232 ports 4424 od ee a et 27 1 32 SIM card slot o o 28 1 33 LEDS i 24 42444 4b ea rr E 28 134 AUDIO jack 0 29 1 4 Back side description 30 1 4 1 GSM Antenna connector 30 1 42 GPS Antenna connector 30 1 4 3 I O molex type connector 30 1 4 4 Power ignition molex type connector 31 1 5 Specifications 2 a eee ee 33 1 5 1 Dimensions 0 4 33 1 5 2 Environment 04 33 Luo IPOWEE 4 souk ee Ree ee eee ee
23. 3 21 1 Over The Air Depending on the selected APN s Internet access the unit may be com manded to initiate an over the air firmware upgrade process using Digital Communications Te echnologies s servers or if no Internet access is avail able for the units the user may create a firmware server for its units to use as upgrading servers For the last method contact Digital Communications Note TMp Technologies for instructions and support Not all of the units have the over the air firmware upgrade feature Warni enabled TAIP error 69 or 90 is returned when trying to upgrade arning one of these units The feature can be enabled with instructions from DCT The first method is preferred as it only requires the use of a single com mand for the unit to begin and manage the whole upgrading process This process is stared with the XAFU message See the TAIP reference for detailed information The message takes a firmware version number for ex ample 5 22 a flag that tells which server to use DCT s or any defined by the user and a Destination Address or Destination Point to send the up grade progress state A normal update process showing diagnostic messages over the serial port is something like gt SXAFU005228V15 ID 0000 lt gt RXAFU00522SV15 ID O000 lt gt RTXFW update Starting ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW update Connected ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW update Download started ID 0000 lt gt
24. For more information on these software tools contact Digital Communi cations Technologies 88 y Q 4 Configuration The Antares SB configuration is done through the unit s TAIP console via TAIP commands The TAIP console can be used with several commu nication methods e The unit s serial port e TCP or UDP GPRS level communication e 2 way SMS GSM level This means that the unit is configured over the air in the same way as it is done locally As described in the Operation chapter the TAIP console works on a question answer basis So when configuring the unit a similar configuration confirmation schema has to be followed This means that a configuration message which is really a TAIP set message has to be responded by the unit with exactly the same response message before it can be assumed that the unit accepted the configuration message If this confirmation fails a retry timeout mech anism has to be followed All of the configuration messages are immediately saved on persistent mem ory they will not be lost when the power is lost and with a few exceptions described on the TAIP reference all commands take effect immediately As long as the configuration confirmation mechanism is implemented it is irrelevant if the configuration commands are sent manually or if a script file tmf file is sent with the TAIP Downloader software The order of the configuration messages is also irrelevant but the user nee
25. Here is an example of creating a turn by turn report using 45 degrees as heading change to trigger event 40 Set a heading delta of 45 degrees gt 5XAGH021045 lt Now a reporting event can be created using the J signal associated with the heading delta we just created gt SED40NVO JO2 lt 4 16 Driving Metrics Acceleration Max Speed etc Antares SB has the ability of calculating the vehicle s positive and nega tive accelerations based on GPS information The instant acceleration value gives an idea of how a vehicle is being drove Large positive values indicates excessive use of gas pedal and large negative values indicates hard breaking DCT 117 i Q 4 16 DRIVING METRICS ACCELERATION MAX SPEED ETC situations A vehicle having large acceleration values indicates unsafe an expensive driving On the contrary low values indicate an smooth efficient driving The actual acceleration of the vehicle can be known with the XAIT command It could also be programmed to be reported by using QXAIT on an event s user action field or by using an extended EV reporting messages which includes the acceleration value The XAIT command also gives information on the maximum positive ac celeration maximum negative acceleration and maximum speed since the last Driving Metrics reset These values are stored along with the GPS in formation at the moment the maximum occurred i e Date time position speed heading A Drivin
26. Text Message Qualifiers S R This message is used to transfer messages between the unit and any Destination Printable ASCII characters as well as byte like messages can be transfered by means of escaping sequences The message has the following format A Chars Item Format Value Meaning Text String A string Any printable character but gt lt These characters and any other non printable charac ters can be transmitted using the escape se quences of the next table 6 26 1 Escape sequences Sequence Meaning a 0x07 alert b 0x08 backspace e 0x1B escape VW Ox0C form feed n Ox0A line feed Ox5C 1 t 0x09 tab r 0x0D carriage return As 0x3B Xy 0x3E gt z 0x3C lt XX Any two digit character hex value printable or not 6 26 2 Garmin Mode Messages When the Garmin Mode is active Please consult the XAGM TAIP message for information about Garmin Mode Antares SB will send the Status Messages and Text Messages to the server using the following modifications of the TX TAIP message TXGMKI Garmin Mode Driver ID Unsolicited This message will be sent by Antares SB each time the user changes the Driver ID on the Garmin device This message has the following format 206 6 26 TX TEXT MESSAGE AAAAAAAAAABB
27. as an abnormal condition Create an intelligent Time and Distance report which automatically increases the reporting criteria to a top as the vehicle travels fast and decreases it to a minimum when the vehicle travels at low or zero speeds Create a confirmation report that confirms that a remotely set output has reached the set state Once you have defined a trigger and or a set of triggers the next step for configuring the Antares SB event machine is to tell the unit what to do when a trigger goes off There are two types of actions the unit may take when a trigger goes off These are the report action and the user defined action DCT 98 y O Report action User defined action s 4 5 EVENT MACHINE When the event machine detects that a trigger goes off it uses the configura tion of the report action to generate a report A report action configuration includes routing options and a type of report The routing options tell the unit where to report the occurrence of the spe cific event The report destinations may be IP addresses or host names cellular phone numbers unit s serial port It could also be a silent report which is not reported to any destination The type of report is used to tell the unit which kind of TAIP report message generate when reporting to a destination The unit supports two reporting messages e ET Time only report Use T as Message ID on an event definition See the ED messa
28. lt The server must be configured to receive unsolicited messages or else the message will be lost Antares will not send any confirmation message when an action is perform on a message from the Garmin s outbox Another option to send messages from the Garmin device is using the Garmin s canned messages DCT 76 8 86 3 18 GARMIN DEVICES SUPPPORT No May be Later The user just needs to select the desired message and select Yes when prompted Send Message May be Antares will send the message to the server like this gt RTXGMTRO0000001180936526626May be lt To use the Stop Messages functionality the server must first send the Stop Message using the XAGMS TAIP message gt SXAGMS0001244753308 0307600189 0957793861127 lt Antares will send two messages The first message will be a confirmation that the Stop Message was received gt RXAGMS0001244753308 0307600189 0957793861DCT lt If there is a communications problem and the Garmin device does not receive the message Antares will respond with Error 46 Internal communications problem The second message will be an unsolicited message indicating the state of the Stop Message A new Stop Message is marked as Unread Inactive by the Garmin device gt RTXGMSS000102000 lt The Garmin device will show a floating icon indicating that a new stop message has arrived DCT 77 866 3 18 GARMIN DEVICES SUPPPORT
29. s of three modes using the Counter C Com Timer T or Distancer D command mands table 1 Recycle C flag Action performed when the counter Flag threshold is reached R Recycle counter set to zero C Continue counter X Use existing or default Re cycle Flag 5 Value DDDDD seconds Threshold counter increment when used with the I command or set with the V command 5 Value EEEEE seconds Data increment value for Counter modes For Timers the counter value is incre mented by 1 for every Delta elapsed sec onds For Distancers the counter value is incremented by 1 for every Delta accu mulated meters traveled 179 Y 6 9 GC COUNTERS TIMERS DISTANCERS 6 9 1 Counters commands 6 9 2 Examples Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Value Meaning C Sets the counter type to Counter with a threshold value de fined as DDDDD The value for this type of counter can only be changed with the increment 1 or value V command T Set and start a Timer counter with a threshold value defined as DDDDD time increment 1 or EEEEE seconds D Set and start a Distance counter with a threshold value defined as DDDDD distance increment 1 or EEEEE meters S Counter update is suspended R Resume a suspended counter The time or distance increments occurring while the counter were suspended are not added upon resume I Only for Counters type counters Increment the counter s val
30. specified action is specified but no reporting is desired 11 Several TAIP actions can be set on an event definition See the ED message for information 12 Shutting an engine off without considering a vehicle s state is not advised See the Scenarios chapter for better ways of doing this 99 i O 4 5 EVENT MACHINE an user action so there is a wide range of possibilities to choose Some of them include e Change a reporting schedule according to a special region and or time of day e Start a situation timer For example to keep track of the time a secu rity door remains open Another example of using timers and events is to keep track of a vehicle s IDLE situation like when a vehicle re mains at rest with the ignition ON and or monitor a STOP situation meaning the vehicle is at rest and the ignition is OFF e Keep track of how many times a situation occurs Like keeping track of how many times a speed limit is violated e Lock or unlock the vehicle s doors e Go to sleep mode to preserve the unit s back up battery e Start a voice call to a predefined phone number e Activate a led connected to any output so the driver knows when there is a voice call being held to any of the authorized phone numbers e Activate a led connected to any output whenever a vehicle is out of a polygonal geo fence e Have the Antares SB safely 3 turn the vehicle s engine off whenever this travels too far from the normal working
31. the unit moves from one Cell to another This can be used by a Tracking System to create an Operator s Cell ID map by combining the Cell ID and GPS information reported by the unit whenever the Cell changes Just cre ate an event that depends on the Cell ID change signal and that uses the extended EV format A defined on the previous example gt SEDOONAO F14 lt Refer to the XAPM message 4 26 Restoring the unit The drive the unit to its factory defaults use the gt SRT ALL lt command A system reset is automatically performed after receiving the command You can not use this command over the air You can also use the gt SRT CONFIG lt to delete all parameters but a few essential communication ones Refer to the RT message for more information 4 27 Resetting the unit Use the gt SRT lt command to perform a software reset on the unit DCT 125 ll 4 28 USING SCRIPTS 4 28 Using Scripts Scripts are text files with extension tmf used to create store edit an Antares SB configuration These text files are passed to the unit via serial port with TAIP Downloader Tool See the TAIP Downloader Tool section of the Operation chapter for in formation on using this software On the script file you put the same configuration messages that will be given manually to the unit in a new line each The order of messages is not relevant as they are all going to be given to the unit at the moment of writing the script T
32. will send the following message when the Driver Status is changed on the Garmin device gt RTXGMKS000000000206202336580000000000 ID Test lt TXGMSS Garmin Mode Stop Message Status Unsolicited This message will be sent by Antares SB each time the user performs an action on a Stop Message found in the Garmin s Stop Message list This message will only be sent by Antares SB if the Garmin device support Application Protocol A603 If the complete Stop Message list is deleted Antares SB will only report that the last message on the list was deleted This message has the following format DCT 207 Y 6 26 TX TEXT MESSAGE AAABBBCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Stop ID AAA 000 255 ID used sulted to identify the Stop Message to be con 3 Status BBB 100 104 100 101 102 103 104 Active status The Stop is active The value of Index will correspond to the cur rent position of the Stop in the list Done status The Stop is marked as Done The value of Index will correspond to the current position of the Stop in the list Unread Inactive The Stop has not been read and it is inactive The value of Index will correspond to the current position of the Stop in the list Read Inactive The Stop has been read but it is inactive The value of Index will correspond to the current position of the Stop in the list Deleted The Stop has been deleted The Garmin devi
33. 1 GSM status E 0 5 GSM status 0 Not registered not searching 1 Registered home network 2 Not registered searching 3 Registration denied 4 Unknown 5 Registered roaming 2 RSSI FF 00 31 Received Signal Strength Indicator 1 GPRS Attach G flag 1 indicates that the unit is GPRS attached 0 indicates GPRS de attached state 1 GPRS state H 0 9 GPRS state 0 Initializing 2 Idle 4 Dialing 6 Connected Ready T No APN 8 Stopped 9 No network E Error Use QXANS 2 Number of SVs II Number of usable GPS satellites 1 GPS date source J Source of GPS data See Source table on PV message 1 GPS data age K Age of GPS data See Age table on PV message 1 GPS tracking L 0 C hex GPS tracking status code See Tracking Status table on ST status message 2 GPIOS Mask MM hex Always returns FO 2 I Os state NN hex Inputs less significant nibble and Outputs state For diagnostic level 1 218 6 34 XADM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE ABBCCDDEFGGHI J JKLMNNOOPPQQRRR Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 level A Diagnostic level 1 Second level 2 FW family BB 05 Firmware family Always return 05 2 FW version CC Firmware version 2 FW version DD Type SV Stable Version Ax Alfa version x indicates the revision number Bx Beta version x indicates the revision number 1 SIM state E 0 9 SIM card state 0 No PIN attempts left 3 PIN error SIM ready
34. 2 What if the vehicle moves too slow and or the distance threshold is large Or worse what if it does not move at all It will report very few times or may never report To solve this problem the distance only report is improved with a Time and Distance report that adds two controlling parameters for the Distance threshold These parameters are the Minimum time between reports and the Maximum time between reports The Maximum time between reports takes control of the report when the unit has not exceeded the Distance threshold for a long time So this value ensures a minimum reporting frequency One way to see this parameter is that this time will be the report period when the vehicle is stationary The Minimum time between reports takes control of the report when the unit exceeds the Distance threshold Assuring that even when the unit is exceeding the Distance threshold it will not report too frequently no more frequent than the configured minimum time value One way of seeing this parameter is that this time will be the report period when the vehicle is moving too fast A Time and Distance signal is configured with the following parameters DCT 110 G Example 4 11 USING TIME WINDOWS 1 Distance Threshold 2 Minimum time between reports 3 Maximum time between reports A T amp D signal TD gets high according to its defined T amp D parameters and it is immediately reset after all events have been evaluated in
35. 209 6 26 TX TEXT MESSAGE TXGMTS Garmin Mode Sent Message Status Unsolicited This message will be sent by Antares SB each time the user performs an action on a Text Message found in the Garmin s Inbox This message will only be sent by Antares SB if the Garmin device support Application Protocol A604 If the complete Inbox is deleted Antares SB will only report that the last message on the list was deleted The message has the following format AAAAAB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 Message ID AAAAA integer The ID of the message that was modified 1 Status B 0 2 0 Message is unread 1 Message is read 2 Message not found or deleted For example when the user opens a message from the Garmin s inbox it will be marked as read and Antares will send a message to notify this action gt RTXGMTSO00001 lt If the message is deleted from the inbox Antares will send to the server gt RTXGMTSO000002 lt 210 A O 6 27 VR VERSION NUMBER 6 27 VR Version number Qualifiers Q R This message returns the unit s firmware version The message has the following format Antares GPS A A AA B C Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Version A AA Firmware version number number 1 Reserved B 1 Reserved C 211 A O 6 28 XAAC ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER 6 28 XAAC Analog to Digital converter Qua
36. 245 6 47 XAIM IMEI consult 246 6 48 XAIO Input Outputs consult 247 6 49 XAIP IP address 2d 622 dete ehh Ge bes 248 6 50 XAIR Create Circular Region here 249 6 51 XAIT Driving Metrics 250 6 52 XAKA Keep Alive 3 2245245505440 4 4 251 6 53 XAKL GPS Back Log 646 ea a ee 252 6 54 XALL Local Lock 2 cs 4 ee ep eae ea S 253 6 55 XAMD MD5 Check 00004 254 6 56 XANB Network Band mode 255 6 57 XANS Network Status GPRS 256 6 58 XAOE Engine s RPM thresholds 257 6 59 XAOF Fuel Level percentage values 258 6 60 XAOG Remaining Fuel Gallons thresholds 259 6 61 XAOR Fuel Rate thresholds 260 16 pS Contents 6 62 XAOS OBD Status Consult 261 6 63 XAOT Throttle Position thresholds 263 6 64 XAPM Power Management 264 6 64 1 Examples a gt sao sa sasana saraaa 266 6 65 XAPW Set Password sv ss e 267 6 66 XARD Reset diagnostics o 268 6 67 XARE Regions Report 269 6 68 XASD Destinations Set 270 6 69 XASF Store amp Forward Buffer 271 6 70 XASG SMS Messages Gateway 272 6 11 XASI IMSI Consult 24 4 0 04 sew ow seso 273 6 72 XATA SMS Alias 4 aac Owe eee bd Hi ee 274 6 73 XATD Current Destination Point 275 6 74
37. Any device using this APN has the ability of communicating with any IP network on the Internet Specifically if you are running your AVL Automated Vehicle Lo cation server on the Internet this is the kind of APN you want An APN has the form of a server name on a dot separated format and it is supplied by the cellular carrier For example this is an apn com or internet carrier name com Setting the APN on the Antares SB is also done with the RF message An empty APN may be configured too An empty value is used when a GPRS session is not desired For more information refer to the TAIP reference but the command takes the following form To set the APN to internet carrier name com send to the unit gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt To leave the APN parameter empty gt SRFA lt You can check the GPRS registration status with the XANS message and or with the On line led This led has to be either ON or blinking when GPRS is up For more information consult the TAIP reference and the Leds sub section on the Operation chapter An APN configuration can be issued at any time and the unit will start registering to the GPRS network as soon as the GSM registration process is done and the APN parameter is set The Antares SB will not start a GPRS session if it is not reg istered on the GSM network And when the GSM network is lost the GPRS session is lost too However the unit may work on the GSM network regardless
38. C19 Counters Timers Distancers True when the corresponding counter reaches its defined threshold value See the GC message DOO D04 ADC Levels True when the ADC input voltage level is above the value defined with the XAGA message E00 E49 Event Triggers True when the corresponding event trigger is True See the ED message FOO Ignition True when the ignition input of the unit is on FO1 GPS Fix True when doing GPS fixes F02 GSM GPRS Roaming True when the unit is Roaming on GSM GPRS F03 GSM Registered True when the unit is registered in the GSM network F04 GPS Antenna Feed line fault Indicates a short on the GPS antenna cable F05 GPRS Registered True when the unit is registered on the GPRS network F08 GPRS Attached True when the unit is attached to the GPRS network F09 MDT PAD Mode True when the unit is in MDT PAD mode See the MT message F10 PAD message True when an MDT message is received on the serial port when PAD mode is ON See the MT message F11 Woke Up True when the unit wakes up after sleep power mode Im mediately reset after the first events evaluation See the XAPM message F12 12volts 24volts detector True when the main supply voltage is above 16 volts F13 Power True when the unit s main power supply is on F14 Cell ID change This signal transitions to True when the unit registers in a new cell G00 G07 General Purpose Input Outputs These signals are true when the corresponding GPIO is tru
39. Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Index AA 00 04 Heading delta index 1 Active flag B flag 1 Define the heading delta U Delete the heading delta 3 Delta CCC 005 090 Heading delta change to be moni tored See the Configuration chapter for more information on using heading deltas to create a turn by turn report 229 A O 6 42 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE XAGM Garmin Mode Qualifiers Q S R Use Garmin devices as communication tools between the driver and the AVL server The Garmin device allows an Antares SB user to send and receive text messages from or to a server It also allows to receive Stop Messages from the server that can help create routes for the vehicle to follow Antares SB can work with any Garmin device that have the Fleet Management Protocol implemented The Garmin Mode must be enabled for Antares SB to communicate with the Garmin device The XAGM TAIP message is used to control the Garmin Mode and the comunication between Antares SB and the Garmin device The message has the following format To Enable Disable the Garmin Mode AB Chars Item Format Value Meaning Action A flag E Enable Garmin Mode D Disable Garmin Mode Destination Point B 0 F Unrequested Status Messages and Text Mes sages from the Garmin Device will be sent to this Destination Point One character corre sponding to the hex value of the Destination Poin
40. Flag C flag When set a CR and LF is appended to every unit s re sponse report T True Default F False ER Flag D flag When set enables error responses T True Default F False CS Flag E flag When set enables checksum re sponses T True F False Default 196 Y 6 20 RP REGISTRATION PARAMETERS CELLULAR NETWORK 6 20 RP Registration Parameters Cellular Network Qualifiers Q R This message reports the unit s cellular registration state The message has the following format ABBCCCC Item Format Units Meaning Registration A 0 E Values state 0 Not registered and not searching operator 1 Registered in home network 2 Not registered and searching operator 3 Not registered Registration denied 4 Unknown This state should be temporal 5 Registered and roaming 6 Not Registered Network lock T Not Registered SIM PIN er ror 8 Not Registered SIM PIN wait 9 Not Registered SIM in serted A Not Registered SIM re moved B Not Registered SIM PIN OK C Not Registered Error read ing PIN D Not Registered SIM initial ization not done yet E Not Registered Unknown SIM error RSSI BB 00 31 RSSI Received Signal Strength Indi cator This a decimal value that indi cates the power of the received signal See explanation at the end of the sec tion RSS CCCC dBm RSS 1
41. For any change to be accurately read the 10 seconds has to pass in order for the average computation to get stable This reading method gives the converter the ability to filter rapid changes or voltage swings that are undesirable when the voltage is proportional to some physical variables prone to this behavior The actual computed value in millivolts may be consulted at any time with the XAAC message see the TAIP reference for more infor mation Query the actual computed value gt QXAAC lt For an ADC computed value of 23 344 volts 72 OF 32V the unit responds gt RXAAC23344P072 lt Sending reports whenever the ADC reaches some value or whenever it falls from another value is possible by using the Event Machine Up to 5 ADC thresholds may be defined with the XAGA message DCT 54 Pa Example 3 6 Back up Battery Warning 3 6 BACK UP BATTERY with the D signals which are configured with the XAGA message Have the unit send event code 23 whenever the ADC input voltage goes beyond 20 volts and code 21 whenever the voltage falls below 12 volts Create the 2 ADC thresholds gt SXAGA01V12000 lt gt SXAGAO2V20000 lt Create the events associated with signals D01 and D02 gt SED21XV0 D01 lt gt SED23XVO DO2 lt These events will send the report to the serial port See the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter for more information The Antares SB offers the possibility of a
42. Note 3 8 OVER THE AIR 1 From a SMS Destination mobile number that has TAIP con sole access send a SMS with a command that instructs the unit to send a hello type report to the IP host which is going to interact with the unit Thus this SMS will have to be sent only when the communication via IP is lost due to a NAT expiration time This eliminates the need of a keep alive for TCP or UDP report and depending on the SMS charging value it may lead to a cost effective solution for having the unit s TAIP console remotely available all the time For a hello type report see the XACT TAIP command 2 Have the units work on a private network with the IP hosts so there is no NAT involved For more information on the NAT problem refer to the Internet and NATs section of this chapter To interact with the unit via SMS messages a Destination holding the sender s Telephone Number has to be defined As Telephone Number destinations are also used for voice call authorization generation the Destination configuration has to be so that TAIP console access is granted See the XADP TAIP message for more information Once the Destination is correctly configured the unit will respond with an SMS message to any TAIP command received via a SMS message from that destination When creating the Destination make sure of using the Telephone Number string that the unit receives from the cellular operator as generating party Some
43. Note This upgrade is done trough the unit s serial port with a terminal software TM TM like Windows Hyperterminal A hez file containing the firmware is required For the firmware file and instructions contact Digital Communi cations Technologies 3 22 TAIP Downloader Tool Write Read scripts Warning Use this tool to Write or Read a configuration script to from an Antares SB A configuration script is a plain text file that holds TAIP configura tion messages on each line with the possibility of including user comments that are not passed to the unit on a Write process The software uses a command answer mechanism and a retry timeout mech anism that is suitable for communicating with the unit s TAIP console For more information on creating reading and writing scripts refer to the Using Scripts section of the Configuration chapter The TAIP Downloader software can be downloaded for free from http www digitalcomtech com Make sure of using version 1 0 7 or superior of TAIP Downloader a Contact Digital Communications Technologies for information on how to upgrade To install TAIP Downloader simply run the installer The tool can be opened from Windows Start All Programs TAIP Downloader DCT 85 e G 3 22 TAIP DOWNLOADER TOOL WRITE READ SCRIPTS 3 22 1 Communicating locally with the Antares SB Power on the unit Connect a direct serial cable between the unit s
44. RTXFW download progress 235495 20368 B 8 2546B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 40736 B 17 4073B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 61104 B 25 5092B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 81416 B 34 4062B sec ID 0000 lt DCT 83 y How does it work Remarks Example 3 21 FIRMWARE UPGRADE gt RTXFW download progress 235495 101840 B 43 4084B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 122208 B 51 4073B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 142520 B 60 4062B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 162944 B 69 4084B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 183256 B 77 4062B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 203680 B 86 5106B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW download progress 235495 224048 B 95 4073B sec ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW update Download OK ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW update Installing module will restart ID 0000 lt gt RTXFW update New firmware installed Running version Antares GPS 05 22 ID 0000 lt After entering the XAFU command the update process is queued until the unit has GPRS access When GPRS is available it starts connecting to the firmware server Then the unit will try to connect and download the se lected firmware a finite number of times The unit downloads the new firmware in a safe mode In a separate memory place to guarantee that if the
45. Re Red 33 1 5 4 Inputs Ignition regida 34 1 5 5 Outputs o 34 1 5 6 Analog To Digital Converter 34 Dib Audio 2 eia aea ae da o gad 34 1 5 8 GSM GPRS module 35 1 5 9 GPS module o 36 1 5 10 GSM antenna connector 37 1 5 11 GPS antenna connector 38 2 Installation 39 2 1 Power Supply 22200004 39 2 1 1 Vehicles with a main power switch 39 2 2 Inputs detection 00004 43 2 3 Ignition detection 0 43 DA Qutputs aa aoe os Boe A SRO EG A Ras gud 44 2 5 Connection diagrams 0 46 Contents 3 Operation 48 3 1 Serial Port csa cao ea ee ee 49 3 2 LEDS israel HG Se 49 3 2 1 Power Red 03 a dee a ae 4 50 3 2 2 Signal Orange asi te ee we eS 50 3 2 3 Pe YO ss ok Vek Pe He Ra eR Pe ey 51 3 2 4 On line Green eee bes 51 de Inputs Ignition 24 2444442444 02456 8 24 52 3 4 Outputs 22 68 64 eka rusa ee ee 53 3 5 Analog to Digital Converter 54 3 6 Back up Battery 2 00 55 Buk Sleep Mod go sk de ee He Soe pe He we 57 3 8 Over The Air e 57 38 1 Via IP hosts GPRS 2 4464 acu 0 57 3 8 2 Via SMS GSM 2 2 9 0 3 1 0 0 60 3 8 3 Voice GSM ee 61 3 9 TAIP console veta he ua e 61 3 9 1 TAIP Message Format 61 3 9 2 Reporting messages 64 3 9 3 Interacting
46. Script 3 22 6 Over The lr o Configuration dad Units ID ns bee eaea an a ee E 4 2 Enabling the unit on GSM and GPRS 4 2 1 SIM Card s PIN for GSM registration 4 2 2 Access Point Name APN for GPRS set up 4 3 Destinations DPs and DAs 4 3 1 Destination Points DPs 4 3 2 Destination Addresses DAs 10 8 6 lC Contents 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 Reporting e 95 Event Machines iaa ar 96 4 5 1 Triggers 96 ADD ACONES 8 4 4 a e ar wd eek Re ee a 98 40 3 Events os Soak rs ee Ble Poe ees 101 ADA SIMS kk ek ee Oe We aR RR s 102 4 5 55 Examples 0 107 Using Polygonal Regions 2 0 eee ee 107 Using Circular Regions geo fences 108 Using Region ID Reports 109 Setting Speed Limits o o 109 The Time And Distance criteria 110 Using Time Windows 0 0 o o 111 Using Counters o o 111 Manipulating signals o o o 116 User signals ee es 116 Using Heading Deltas turn by turn report 116 Driving Metrics Acceleration Max Speed etc 117 Using Acceleration signals o o 119 Voice calls s s a socos oaoa sd ek a 120 Battery m
47. TAIP specification error list for any error on the process 4 28 4 Scripts Over The Air TAIP Downloader Tool uses the PC s serial ports to communicate with a unit By means of third party softwares a virtual serial port can be created so that the virtual communication is done via TCP or UDP This enables the reading and writing process of scripts to be done remotely One of such tools that creates a virtual serial port connected trough a TCP connection is HW Virtual Serial Port which can be found at http www HW group com Remember that the Antares SB works as a TCP client so HW Virtual Serial Port has to be configured as server To do so make sure to select the option HW VSP works as the TP Server only box on the software DCT 128 lO 4 28 USING SCRIPTS For more information on these software tools contact Digital Communi cations Technologies 129 A O 5 Scenarios and examples 5 1 Getting Started For this chapter It is assumed that the reader already has access to the unit s TAIP console trough the unit s serial port using a terminal software like Windows Hyperterminal Refer to the Operation chapter for more information This example is a step by step instructional on getting started with the unit s configuration At the end the reader should have the unit reporting an input activation and a periodic message to an IP host 5 1 1 Setting the unit s ID In order for the unit to be identifi
48. TD2 amp FOO amp lt gt REDO3NV2 GOO lt gt REDO4ANVO AOOTD3 amp F00 amp lt gt REDOSNV1 A00 FO3 amp TD3 amp F00 amp lt gt REDO6XMO FO3 TD3 amp FO0 amp lt gt REDO7NVO AOOU00 amp ACT SSSU000 lt gt REDO8NV1 AOO FO3 amp U00 amp ACT SSSU000 lt DCT 101 pS 4 5 EVENT MACHINE gt REDO9U lt gt RED10NVO A00U018 ACT SSSU010 lt gt RED11NV1 A00 FO3 amp U01 amp ACT SSSU010 lt gt RED12U lt gt RED13U lt gt RED14U lt gt RED15U lt gt RED16U lt gt RED17U lt gt RED18U lt gt RED19U lt gt RED20NVO0 AOOCO2 amp lt gt RED21NV1 A00 C028 lt gt RED22XM0 F03 C028 lt gt RED23U lt gt RED24U lt gt RED25U lt gt RED26U lt gt RED27U lt gt RED28U lt gt RED29U lt gt RED30U lt gt RED31U lt gt RED32U lt gt RED33U lt gt RED34U lt gt RED35U lt gt RED36sVO S00 ACT SGCO2U lt gt RED37sVO S00 ACT SGCO2TCO00010 lt gt RED38U lt gt RED39U lt gt RED405sV0 F00 ACT SSSU001 lt gt RED41sVO F00 ACT SSSU011 lt gt RED42U lt gt RED43U lt gt RED44U lt gt RED45U lt gt RED46U lt gt RED47U lt gt RED48U lt gt RED49U lt You can see some events having a user defined TAIP action different routing options and many undefined events having a U for undefined after the event ID For more information on how to interpret this reading as well as how to create such configuration
49. The Air section of the Operation chapter This example which is based on the Getting Started example is resumed on the following script Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Unit s ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIM s PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678 lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt Time only Time And Distance 137 z Q 5 3 ADDING SMS INTERACTION signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input report event gt SEDOSNV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05 gt SXATMO5Input 3 has been activated lt end 5 3 Adding SMS interaction Once a Phone Number type destination has been created it is possible to interact with the unit via SMS messages generated from that phone number as long as the Destination configuration allows TAIP console access to the configured DP This means taking care of the Access parameter on the Destination Point definition Continuing with ou
50. Vehicle is ON MIL is ON Trip Odometer at 42 5 miles No secondary tool connected 262 y 6 63 XAOT Throttle Position thresholds Qualifiers Q S R 6 63 XAOT THROTTLE POSITION THRESHOLDS This message is used to configure the Throttle Position thresholds associated to the OT signals The message has the following format ABCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Index A 0 4 Threshold index 1 Action B flag 1 Sets the threshold U Deletes the threshold 5 Throttle Posi CCC 000 100 Throttle Position thresholds Percentage tion value For example to set throttle threshold 2 to 70 percent use gt SXAOT21070 lt Now to generate an event when such threshold is exceeded gt SED31NVO OT2 lt 263 Y 6 64 XAPM POWER MANAGEMENT 6 64 XAPM Power Management Qualifiers S Q R This command activates deactivates the unit s power saving mode sleep mode When power saving mode is activated the unit will go to sleep after 2 minutes as long as no communication activity is detected over the GPRS network SMS channels or local TAIP console If there is communication activity when the 2 minutes expire the unit will wait for 1 minute of communication inactivity before going to sleep When power saving is deactivated the unit will never go to sleep and will can cel any previously defined power saving activation timer When th
51. Y 5 9 1 Script 5 9 IMPROVING THE PERIODIC REPORT e Distance Threshold 2km 1 2mi e Maximum time between reports 55 minutes The reason for having 55 minutes instead of 1 hour has to do with the dis cussion on having the unit always available for communication presented on the Operation chapter This configuration leads to not having the unit report more frequent than a 2 minute period and having the unit to report at least once every 55 minutes Other configurations include changing the T amp D criterion as the vehicle s speed increases and or only reporting when the vehicle s ignition is on To use the new T amp D criterion we change our T amp D 8 definition to gt STD80120000000203555 lt And leave the rest of the script unchanged Changing only the TD8 definition our script ends up Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting SMS interaction Voice interaction Ignition sense Speed viol and warning START STOP monitoring Safe engine turn off A better T amp D criterion tt tt He te t Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Essential configurations Units ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIMs PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt 154 A O 5 9 IMPROVING THE
52. a message is sent us ing an ID that is already in use by Garmin Antares SB will return Er ror 67 Message Type B flag Indicates how Garmin should handle the message This flag is only mat ters on Garmin devices that support the Application Protocol A604 If the Garmin device does not support A604 all the messages will be sent to the inbox 0 Sends the message to the Garmin device inbox The user will consult it from there 1 Shows the message on screen im mediately 10 Time CCCCCCCCCC Seconds This will be the Time and Date shown in the message Is the number of sec onds since 12 00 am December 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will re ceive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 0 70 Text Message DDD Varies This will be the message shown in the Garmin device screen It can con tain any set of ASCII characters The messages can be up to 70 characters long For example to send a text message to the Garmin device using ID 00000 send gt SXAGMTS0000001244751579Hello World lt Antares will respond to the server gt RXAGMTS0000001244751579Hello World lt XAGMT Garmin Mode Message Status Qualifiers Q R To consult the status of a message sent to the Garmin device use the T modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 This message has the following
53. actions Then it gives an overview of the events definition to complement the TAIP refer ence Finally explains one of the most important components of the events triggers Signals The Event Machine based on user s configuration decides what where and when to send a report and or execute an action but it is not all of the configuration needed by the unit When the user starts configuring the Event Machine it is assumed that he has already defined the Destination Addresses an their corre sponding Destination Points as described on the previous sections of this chapter Enabling the unit on the GSM GPRS network is also required A trigger is determinated with the logical combination of several situations also called signals A logical combination is basically an equation specifi cally a boolean equation that combines signals situations with the logical operators AND OR and NOT In Antares these boolean equations use the post fixed notation meaning that the operator is at the end of the signals to be evaluated When more than three signals are being evaluated a logical op erator must be inserted every two signals in the equation These are some examples of the postfixed notation syntax A or B gt ABI A and B AB A and B and C gt AB amp C amp To determine how the signals will trigger the report a plus or minus sign is added at the end of the equation A plus sign indicates that the repor
54. actual communication channel The command will return the DP index used to generate the QXATD query The message has the following format AA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 DP index AA 00 15 AA holds the DP index used for the actual commu nication 275 y 6 74 XATM USER DEFINED TEXT MESSAGES 6 74 XATM User defined Text Messages Qualifiers S Q R Use this message to set the user custom messages to be used when an SMS report is to be generated to a Telephone type Destination configured to receive non TAIP messages See the XADP message for more information One user text message can be created for each event 00 49 so that when an event report is to be sent as a user custom message the sent message is the one defined with this command XATM for the event code that generates the report The message has the following format Delete AA BBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Event Code AA 00 49 Event code for which the user text message defined on BBB applies to varies Text Message BBB string Text Message Any character but lt gt and can be used 50 characters If this parameter is not present when on the string The maximum size is using the S qualifier the user message for event AA gets deleted See the Adding SMS reporting example on the Scenarios And Examples chapter for more iformation
55. audio system is not included Refer to the Operation and Configuration chapters When the unit is registered on the GSM network in can send and receive SMSs This feature is used to send user defined event s text to phone numbers TAIP reports to SMPP servers and to receive commands or queries to interact with the unit over the air See the Operation and Configuration chapters TCP and UDP support Note The unit may send its reports via GPRS to IP hosts using TCP and or UDP transport protocols As an improvement from previous versions all IP type Destinations can be used either on TCP or UDP and the unit may work with Destinations on TCP and with Destina tions on UDP at the same time This means that a global parameter XASP defining the transport protocol for all DPs no longer exists The DP and XADP TAIP messages have been modified to support this new feature 1 1 7 Over the air control consult The unit can be controlled consulted remotely via GPRS TCP or UDP and or via GSM by means of SMS messages 1 1 8 Over the air upgrade The unit s firmware may be upgraded via GPRS communication with a single instruction 2 Ask for built in battery when buying the unit 3 Not all units have this feature enabled TAIP error 69 or 90 is returned when using the firmware upgrade command XAFU 22 pS 1 1 FEATURES 1 1 9 Versatile RS 232 communication 1 1 10 1 1 11 1 1 12 1 1 13 1 1 14 The
56. available MCC MNC LAC CI BSIC BCCH Freq absolute RxLvl RxLvl Full RxLvl Sub RxQual RxQual Full RxQual sub Idle TS e If Cell Identity is not available MCC MNC LAC BSIC BCCH Freq absolute RxLvl RxLvl Full RxLvl Sub RxQual RxQual Full RxQual sub Idle TS Neighbor1 to Neighbor2 e If Cell Identity is available MCC MNC LAC CI BSIC BCCH Freq absolute RxLvl e If Cell Identity is not available MCC MNC LAC BSIC BCCH Freq absolute RxLvl Where MCC Mobile Country Code 3 digits MNC Mobile Network Code 3 2 digits LAC Local Area Code 4 digit Hexadecimal value identifying a group of cells in a a network CI Cell ID 4 digit Hexadecimal value BSIC Base Station Identity Code BCCH Broadcast Control Channel RxLvl Average Receive level RxLvl Full RxLvl of the cell accessed over all TDMA frames Values RxLvl Sub RxLvl of the cell accessed over a subset of TDMA frames RxQual Average received signal quality BER RxQual Full RxQual of the cell accessed over all TDMA frames RxQual Sub RxQual of the cell accessed over a subset of TDMA frames Idle TS Idle Time Slot Time Slot for listening the control channel All Rx Levels are measured from 0 to 63 where 0 110dBm 1 to 62 109 to 47 dBm 63 48dBm DCT 215 lO 6 32 XACR COUNTER REPORT 6 32 XACR Counter Report Qualifiers S R Use this message to have the unit generate a T
57. available COM ports is only updated at start up If you create connect a new virtual like USB port it won t be listed until a software restart DCT 86 y O 3 22 TAIP DOWNLOADER TOOL WRITE READ SCRIPTS x Serial Port Settings Baud rate 9600 Data bits s y Parity None gt Stop bits fi Flow control None Restore defaults mWait For message response Timeout sec 103 Retries aS JV Wait For set messages confirmation J Include device ID on outgoing messages Restore defaults e Finally contact DCT At this point you have successfully communicated with the unit and any configuration or reading process can take place 3 22 4 Write a Configuration Script You can now configure Antares SB by Writing a configuration script to the unit You can create a configuration script from scratch or copy one of several scripts shown on this manual or you can ask for an script file from DCT For more information on script refer to the Using Scripts section on the Configuration chapter To pass a configuration script to the unit on TAIP Downloader select Device Write configuration TAIP Downloader will ask for an script file This is generally file having the tmf extension but it could be any plain text file with a set of TAIP configuration messages After clicking Open the writing process starts Depending on the script s
58. be altered to include the voice call to DP 10 gt SEDO5NV5 IP3 ACT SXAVC10 lt This will make the unit start a voice call to Phone Number 912345678 any time the input 3 goes high Generating an Ignition ON and or and Ignition OFF event is not different than working with any other input you just have to create event s related to the ignition sense signal the FOO Continuing the Adding SMS reporting example to generate an event code 19 for an Ignition ON send to the unit gt SED19NV4 F00 lt And event code 20 for an Ignition OFF situation gt SED20NV4 FOO lt This last one could have been defined as gt SED20NV4 F00 lt Resulting in the same performance Both events DA is DA 4 the same used by the periodic report event this means that the Ignition ON and OFF events are only going to be sent to the AVL server The resulting script Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting SMS interaction Voice interaction Ignition sense Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Unit s ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIM s PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt 140 y O 5 6 SPEED VIOLATION WITH WARNING REPORT The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPOOOOavl1l server com 2145 lt The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678
59. be sent to the serial port If the event is defined using an Destination Ad dress that contains both an GPRS IP destination point and the destination point P15 Serial port the unit will send the SC Originated Default Mes sage encapsulated EV message to the serial port and a regular EV message to the IP address On the following example we will create a tracking report that depends on two time periods One time period for when the vehicle is traveling and another time period for when the vehicle is not moving The period of time for when the vehicle is traveling will depend on the connectivity to an GPRS IP destination To determine whether the vehicle is traveling or not we will set a Start Condition and a Stop Condition using a low speed limit that assumes that the vehicle is not moving However this script will not report each time the Start and Stop condition are met It only uses DCT 80 Pu G 3 19 ORBCOMM SATELLITE MODEMS SUPPORT this conditions to change the report criteria intelligently In this example the report event will be sent to the serial port only when the GPRS IP destination is unreachable First we must create the IP destination point gt SXADPOOOOav1 server com 1234 lt And a destination address with the destination point gt SDA0 P00 lt Then we must create a Start Stop condition First we define a speed limit of 5mph to determine if the vehicle is traveling or not traveling gt SGS0510050 lt
60. by anyone interacting with the unit and having some basic technical knowledge After reading this document the reader will be capable to install configure and operate the unit on the day to day vehicle tracking job This document is organized in the following way e The About chapter gives a functional and physical description of the unit e The Installation chapter has guides and recommendations on the physical and electrical conditions for the installation of the unit e The Operation chapter gives information on how to interact with the unit e The Configuration chapter instructs on how to configure the unit 0 3 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE e The TAIP reference chapter is a compendium of all the configu ration and query commands therefore it is the big complement of the Operation and Configuration chapters e The Quick Start Guide is a very condensed summary to get you started with the unit 0 3 Technical Assistance You can contact Digital Communications Technologies for technical support at support digitalcomtech com Or by calling 1 305 7183336 9AM to 5PM Eastern US time 20 pg 1 About the Antares SB 1 1 Features The Antares SB is a vehicle tracking and controlling device designed to interact remotely with Automated Vehicle Location AVL systems or end users by using the GSM GPRS cellular network as commu nication media The Antares unit is installed on a vehicle whose geographical position
61. change the speaker volume for voice calls Chars Item Format Value Meaning Action value A 0 9 Volume value 0 9 or volume action to increase to decrease Default value is 5 Example to set the speaker volume to 3 gt SXAVS3 lt To rise the volume one level gt SXAVS lt To lower the volume one level gt SXAVS lt 286 6 85 ERRORS LIST 6 85 Errors list The following table contains a list of the errors returned by the unit with the ER message See the ER message for more information 287 Y 6 85 ERRORS LIST ID Description 00 Unrecognized command 02 The message is not delimited by gt and or lt 03 ID miss match on incoming postfix ID 04 KY miss match on incoming postfix KY 06 Not a valid set message 07 Missing parameter 08 TAIP console is restricted for this DP See the locking parameters on the XADP message 09 Queries resulting on multiple answers are not supported over the air 10 Invalid Speed Threshold query See the GS message 11 Invalid Time Window query See the GT message 12 Invalid Time and Distance query See the TD message 14 Canned Reply list is full 15 Invalid Region query See the GR message 16 Invalid Event query See the E
62. detector The pin out of these signals is unit s main power 31 1 4 BACK SIDE DESCRIPTION The Power Harness female molex type receptacle supplied with the unit is configured as follows Signal Color V Red GND Black Ignition F00 Yellow 32 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS 1 5 Specifications 1 5 1 Dimensions Values shown in millimeters The depth of the unit is 127mm 1 5 2 Environment e Operating 20 C to 55 C e Storage 30 C to 85 C e Humidity Up to 95 non condensing 1 5 3 Power e DC Voltage 8V 32 V e Current consumption With internal battery at full charge IDLE 60mA 12V With internal battery at zero charge IDLE 600mA 12V Without internal battery IDLE 60mA 12V On sleep mode 1mA 12V e Reverse voltage polarity protection e Thermal shutdown and current limit protection DCT 33 G 1 5 4 Inputs Ignition 1 5 5 Outputs 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS e Input impedance 50 Kohms e Internal Pull up 50 Kohms e Sampling rate 3 s sec Inputs detection Logical State Electrical State Active Inactive OV to 1V 2 9V to 32V or Open Ignition detection State Voltage range Ignition ON Ignition OFF 5 8V to 32V OV to 4 8V or Open e Open Drain e Continuous current capacity 2A e Maximum instantaneous current lt 1 sec 10A e Ma
63. doing it locally The unit s configuration and operation is con trolled by means of its TAIP console which is a command response mechanism that allows to change configurations operate outputs and consult the sate of the unit This console can be accessed over the air via IP and or via SMS messages and locally over the serial port In order for the TAIP console to be used remotely a Destination or several of them has to be defined so the unit knows who is authorized to interact with it Destinations are discussed on the Configuration chapter and are configured with the XADP TAIP message refer to those sections for information on how to create and configure Desti nations TAIP queries that generate multiple answers are not supported over the air For example sending gt QED lt without specifying an event s ID is only supported over the serial port 3 8 1 Via IP hosts GPRS To interact with the unit via IP hosts the corresponding IP ad dress name and TCP UDP port has to be created on any of the unit s Destinations space When using TCP the unit functions as a TCP client which always initiates the connection to the remote IP 8 Antares SB supports IP numbers as well as domain names DCT 57 a G 3 8 OVER THE AIR host which acts as a TCP server Once the connection is established the TCP server can send any TAIP command query to the unit using the established connection When using UDP no
64. e For counting distance DISTANCERS e For counting situations COUNTERS For each counter a counter signal Cxx exists A counter signal gets true whenever the counter s value exceeds a user defined threshold and gets low on the contrary For example a time counter TIMER set to count sec onds with a threshold value of 300 will make a corresponding Cxx signal to become true 300 seconds after defining the counter See the next graphic to illustrate this counter value 500 400 300 200 100 300 time s gt SGCO0TCO0300 lt counter signal COO true false time s When a counter reaches the defined threshold it can e Keep on counting continuous counter To define a continuous counter Set the recycle flag to C The previous illustration shows a continuous counter e Reset the counter value to zero recycling counter creating thus a periodic counter signal To define a recycling counter Set the recycle flag to R See the next illustration of a recycling counter DCT 112 pS 4 12 USING COUNTERS counter value 200 100 0 200 400 600 time s gt SGC06TR00200 lt counter signal C06 true false 200 400 600 time s A counter may be suspended and resumed with the GC command Use the S and R commands on a previously defined counter The next graph illustrates this 113 Cl 4 12 USING COUNTERS A counter value can also be manu
65. event 32 as gt REV321447147747 2578440 0802854301000512 AC 12 CVO7 01203 SV 09 ID EXAMPLE lt Notice that the order of information tags defined with the XAEF is not TM preserved Antares SB reports the tags alphabetically For detailed in formation see the ED EV and XAEF messages 162 A O 6 Units TAIP reference 6 1 AL ALTITUDE 6 1 AL Altitude Qualifiers Q R This message gives the vehicle s altitude and vertical speed The message has the following format AAAAABBBBBBCCCCDE Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 GPS Time AAAAA seconds GPS time of day 6 Altitude BBBBBB meters Above Mean Sea Level Altitude It includes the or sign 4 Vertical CCCC mph Vertical velocity It includes the Velocity or sign 1 Data D Data Data acquisition mode in effect Source Source when acquiring AL data Table 1 Data Age E flag Age of available data 0 Not available 1 Old 10 seconds 2 Fresh lt 10 seconds 164 6 2 6 2 CP COMPACT POSITION CP Compact Position Qualifiers Q R This message gives the position solution The message has the following format AAAAABBBCCCCDDDDEEEEFG Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 GPS Time AAAAA seconds GPS time of day 7 Latitude BBB CCCC degrees Latitude in the WGS 84 datum Positive values indicate a northern latitude 8 Longitude D
66. format CY 239 Y 6 42 12 6 42 13 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAAAAB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 Message ID AAAAA 00000 The ID of the message to be con 99999 sulted 1 Message Sta B 0 2 Indicates the status of a message in tus the Garmin device 0 Message is unread 1 Message is read 2 Message not found or deleted For example to consult the status of the message with ID 00000 send gt QXAGMTO0000 lt Antares will respond like this gt RXAGMTSO00000 lt If the message is not read It will respond like this gt RXAGMTSO00001 lt If the message is read XAGMTA Garmin Mode Set Canned Message Qualifiers S R To setup canned messages on Garmin device use the TA modifier The canned messages are used to send quick replies from the Garmin device Up to 120 canned messages can be set This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 This message has the following format AAAB BBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Message ID AAA 0 120 ID of the canned message to be set If a canned message is set with an ID already in use it will overwrite the stored canned message 1 50 Text Message B BBB Varies This is the canned message that will be saved in the Garmin device It can contain any set of ASCII characters For example to set a canned message send gt SXAGMT
67. generated when an event is triggered This message only contains date and time of the generated event The message has the follow ing format AABBBBCDDDDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Event AA 00 49 Event code code 4 GPS BBBB week Number of weeks since 00 00AM Week January 6 1980 The event s date can be deduced from this number 1 Day of C day Day of week From 0 to 6 where 0 week is Sunday 5 GPS Time DDDDD seconds Time of the generated report of day 175 y 6 8 EV EVENT MESSAGE 6 8 EV Event Message Qualifiers R This message is generated when an event is triggered and reported The message has the following format AABBBBCDDDDDEEEFFFFFGGGGHHHHHITIJJJKL EXTENDED EV TAGS Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Event AA 00 49 Event code code 4 GPS BBBB week Number of weeks since 00 00AM January 6 1980 Week The event s date is deduced from this number 1 Day of C day Day of week From 0 to 6 where 0 is Sunday week 5 GPS Time DDDDD seconds Time of the generated report of day 8 Latitude EEE FFFFF degrees WGS 84 Latitude It does include the sign Positive for north 9 Longitude GGGG HHHHH degrees WGS 84 Longitude It does include the sign Positive for east 3 Speed III mph Vehicle velocity 3 Heading JJJ degrees Vehicle heading in degrees from North increasing east wardly 1 Sou
68. gives information on the maximum break force applied the maximum positive acceleration gives information on gas pedal usage and the maximum speed aids in controlling safety and controlling vehicle s stress 4 Mobile Data Terminal Vehicle s device that ables an interaction between a vehicle s crew and an AVL facility DCT 23 G 1 1 FEATURES 1 1 15 GPS Back Log and Acceleration 1 1 16 IMEI as ID 1 1 17 Cell ID reporting Positive and negative accelerations can be monitored to generate re ports on large gas pedal usage and breaking crashing conditions Also a GPS Back Log that stores all data received from the internal GPS module at a 1 second rate can be retrieved at any time for exam ple when a large negative acceleration possible crash is detected With this log the last minute of the vehicle s location speed can be examined second by second This feature allows the unit to tag every reported message with the unit s IMEI This eases the management of unit s as the ID number does not require to be programmed and it is a unique number that can t be reused or shared with another unit Also this number can not be deleted or changed Antares SB can add the Cellular Network Cell ID information on every reported message This enables a Tracking System to locate the unit when GPS is not available Antares SB will report the Cell ID LAC MCC MNC and RSSI of the cell it is registered with This information c
69. has the following format 234 z O 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAAAABBBBBBBBBBCDDD DDD EEE Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 Message AAAAA 0 99999 This counter increases everytime the Driver ID ID changes The starting value is 1 10 Time of BBBBBBBBBB Seconds Time when the change was made Is the change number of seconds since 12 00 am Decem ber 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 1 Message C Flag Indicates how the message is handled Type 0 Will put the message in the Garmin inbox 1 Will show the message on screen immedi ately 3 18 Canned DDD DDD 3 18 IDs of the Canned Replies that will be avail Reply IDs able Each ID is 3 characters long Up to 6 Canned Replies can be used 1 55 Text Mes EEE 1 55 Text message to be sent to the Garmin de sage vice For example to send a text message using the Canned Replies with ID 000 001 and 002 use the following message gt SXAGMRS0000006202344511000001002 Status of package KJP123456 lt Antares SB will reponse like this to confirm that the text message was received gt RXAGMRS0000006202344511000001002 Status of package KJP123456 ID Test lt Then Antares SB will send the following message which indicates which Canned Reply was choosen gt RTXGMTC062023468800000001 ID Test lt 6 42 8 XAGMS Ga
70. how to configure a Telephone Number Destina tion to send either TAIP messages or user messages refer to the XADP message and the XATM message on the TAIP reference 10 Short Message peer to peer Protocol DCT 67 y A 3 11 REPORTS MESSAGES 3 11 Reports messages Antares SB reporting criteria is based on an Event Machine The Event Machine allows the user the creation of up to 50 events These events can be triggered by several situations 1 The Event Machine allows the unit to send event reporting messages when an event occurs and since Firmware Version 5 21 it allows the unit to report the response of any TAIP command that the user locates on the user action section of an event definition So the AVL server shall expect two types of reports from the Antares SB The Events Reporting Messages and the Responses to TAIP commands messages 3 11 1 Events Reporting Messages When a non silent event is triggered a reporting message is generated The reporting message contains among the GPS state of the vehicle the event code which triggered There are two types of Reporting Messages the ET and EV TAIP messages e The ET message gives information on the event code time date and GPS quality when the event occurred Here it is an exam ple of such a Reporting Message for event 38 gt RET381447152212 ID EXAMPLE lt For detailed information on this message refer to the ET message on the Unit s TA
71. lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input report event gt SEDOSNV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05 gt SXATMOSInput 3 has been activated lt Ignition ON event gt SED19NV4 FOO lt Ignition OFF event gt SED20NV4 FOO lt end 5 6 Speed violation with warning report An speed limit violation event that is generated whenever the vehicle ex ceeds a determinated value can be configured as it was done on the Setting Speed Limits of the Configuration chapter Here we are going to add a continuous time condition with a visual warning with a LED so the driver has a chance to slow down before actually reporting the violation For this example let s set an speed limit of 65mph Let s give 15 seconds to the driver for slowing down Let s assume the indicator LED for the speed excess warning is wired to output 1 XP1 The reporting event code for the violation for no particular reason is 10 CY 141 PQ G 5 6 SPEED VIOLATION WITH WARNING REPORT 5 6 1 Setting the speed limit 5 6 2 Start a counter Up to 10 speed limits can be defined on the unit for no particular reason we choose the limit 07 Using the GS messa
72. message 39 Invalid KY set format 40 The signal can not be changed by user See the SS message The signal depends on the units situation and so it can not be arbitrary modified Only user signals and outputs can be manipulated directly by the user 41 An input can not be modified Only outputs may be modified with the SS message 42 Invalid signal index See the Signals Chapter 43 Pending SMS message Can not send a new SMS message until previous message is sent or canceled The table continues on the next page CT 288 yq 6 85 ERRORS LIST Continued from the previous page ID Description 44 Invalid XAGA or XAGB query 45 Wrong XAGA or XAGB parameter 46 Internal communication problem 47 Length exceeded for TX message See the TX message 48 Invalid event index when using the XATM message See the XATM message 49 Invalid XATM message format See the XATM message 50 Invalid reset option See the RT message 51 Can not modify a DP using the TAIP console from the same DP 52 Can not use 0000 as locking code See the XALL message 53 There has to be at least one input to wake up the unit See the XAPM message 54 Invalid parameter on firmware server configuration 55 Invalid size on firmware server configuration 56 Invalid format i
73. methods See the XAKA message for keep alive options The server should have an association between unit s ID and corresponding TCP socket so any user query can be correctly routed There are two ways for the server to know the unit s ID a Extract the ID from the ID postfix of every incoming TAIP message b Send an ID query to an open socket for which the ID is unknown with the gt QID lt command The second option is preferred as with the first one exists the DCT 65 G 3 10 2 3 10 REMOTE HOST SOFTWARE Working with UDP possibility for the server to have open TCP connections with unknown IDs every time an unit opens a connection but it has nothing to report There is a workaround for this Having the unit send a re connection event so every time the connection is opened the server knows who did open it In order to do so use the Axx signals creating an event that sends a report every time the A signal associated to the corresponding P type Destination becomes true However it is more efficient and simple to use the second option when possible as it does not generate an extra report and makes it possible for the user to tell the unit to eliminate the ID postfix from every message thus saving consumption bytes In order to have the unit start connecting to an AVL server an IP type Destination has to be configured first The configuration flag for this Destination must indicate an UDP hos
74. mode does not have any user de fined escape characters or any defined Packet delimiters To enable the Full Binay MDT mode use the H mode of the MT TAIP message I E gt SMTH lt To exit from the Full Binary MDT mode send the TAIP message gt SMTN lt over the air or the string EXIT COMMDATA as a single packet over the serial port For more information refer to the TX and MT messages 4 21 Analog to Digital Converter monitoring The ADC can be monitored with the XAAC message To generate events according to ADC changes use the ADC signals Dxx and their definition with the XAGA message 4 22 Using a TCP UDP keep alive 4 23 IMEI as ID Refer to the XAKA message Antares SB can be programmed to use its International Mobile Equipment Identity IMEI as ID instead of a user set value This is useful for man aging units without worrying of duplicate or changed IDs It also eases the programming task as this number is already stored on every unit To instruct the unit to use its IMEI as ID instead of the ID set by the user with the ID command use the XAID command in the following way gt SXAID1 lt This will make Antares SB use its IMEI as ID an it will ignore any value set with the ID message To instruct the unit not to use its IMEI as ID send to the unit gt SXAIDO lt Note that the unit uses the user defined ID ID command by default You can also consult the unit s IMEI with the XAIM command DCT 123 lO
75. not wake up on a time basis and only an input change may get the unit back to normal mode The unit will wake up when the elapsed time since entering sleep mode equals the wake up interval This is an integer value that can accept the scalar factors m or h on the least significant field to indicate minutes or hours if no scalar factor is included a value of seconds is assumed The minimum value is 1 minute the maximum is 255h 255 hours b i 265 zi G 6 64 1 Examples 6 64 XAPM POWER MANAGEMENT When going to sleep immediately using the I qualifier the saving mode is not preserved i e after the unit wakes up the unit ends the power saving mode Activate the power saving mode Only the vehicle s ignition may awake the unit and when awaken the unit must remain up for 20 minutes gt SXAPMA000000010000020m lt Activate the power saving mode Any input but the 24v 12v detector may awake the unit and the unit has to awake every 2 hours Use default values for the rest gt SXAPMA000001011111DDDDDDDDO002h lt To configure the unit to go to sleep mode any time the external power is removed and to go back to normal mode when the power is connected again 1 Create an event triggered when the power signal F13 goes low that acti vates the Power Saving mode making sure the Power input is included on the signals to be monitored while on sleep state gt SEDOOSVO F13 ACT SXAPMA lt No input mask
76. of the GPRS session state 5 GSM communication only Voice and or SMSs DCT 92 y O 4 3 Warning Note 4 3 DESTINATIONS DPS AND DAS The GPRS registration process is usually charged by the cellular carrier having an incorrect APN will make the unit constantly try on failing GPRS sessions which could lead to an excess on the unit s bytes consumption The APN value can not be changed over the air when communi cating via IP networks This to prevent loosing communication with the unit over GPRS when a wrong APN is used The APN can be modified over the air by means of SMS communication Once the GPRS session is up the unit is ready to communicate with IP networks i e with IP addresses For this the cellular carrier assigns the unit an IP address that is usually but not necessarily dynamic meaning that for every session the unit starts its value changes The actual IP address assigned by the operator through the chosen APN can be consulted with the XAIP command Destinations DPs and DAs Essential configuration A destination makes reference to the device or user that is receiving and or 4 3 1 sending messages from to the Antares SB The possible destination for the unit are e 10 IP hosts Via TCP and or UDP e 5 telephone numbers via SMS e The unit s serial port Each destination is called a Destination Point or simply a DP Destination Points may
77. on an a serial port terminal Another option to disable the MDT mode is sending the string EXIT_COMMDATA as a single packet This is also the only option to disable the Full Binary MDT mode through the serial port On MDT PAD mode Antares SB uses a PAD criteria to send the re ceived message to a Destination The PAD criteria is controlled with the MT message and it is composed by e PAD character 1 e PAD character 2 e PAD Timeout e PAD size 16 Packet Assembly Disassembly 121 Y Example 4 20 SERIAL PORT DEVICES Whenever any of the PAD criterion is met the accumulated message on the unit is transmitted The unit sends and receives the MDT messages using the TX TAIP mes sage Using this TAIP message any binary like data can be transfered by means of escape characters See the TX message on the TAIP reference for more information Having the unit to work on MDT PAD mode so that the serial port can exchange binary data with the IP type Destination 04 The attached de vice uses the byte 03 to signal the end of a binary message For this example let s use the following PAD criteria e PAD character 1 03 not included on message e PAD character 2 FA e PAD size 50 e PAD timeout 10 seconds Let us include the PAD characters on the message and use as escape char the 1B hex value Now we use the MT message to drive the unit to PAD mode passing the criteria we just created gt SMTP010050
78. order to get ready for the activation of the signal again when the T amp D criteria is met on the future To create a tracking event that sends event code 49 based on a T amp D cri terion A 8km 5miles report is desired The criterion must be so that no more than one hour passes between successive reports and the minimum time between successive reports must be 2 minutes To do so we choose for no particular reason the T amp D criterion 6 The requirements call for the following T amp D configuration e Minimum time between reports 120 seconds 2mins e Distance Threshold 80 x 100m 8km e Maximum time between reports 3600 seconds 1hr This configuration is achieved by sending gt STD60120000000803600 lt Now we create event 49 using the TD6 signal gt SED49NVO TD6 lt The T D could also be configured on a time only basis by defining the Minimum Time parameter and setting the others to zero To define a time only criteria of 15 minutes 900 seconds gt STD60900000000000000 lt or gt STD60900 lt 4 11 Using Time Windows 4 12 Using Counters Refer to the GT message Counters configuration manipulation is controlled by the GC message Up to 20 counters can be configured For detailed information and more exam ples see the GC message Next a brief description of counters operation There are three types of counters DCT 111 G 4 12 USING COUNTERS e For counting time TIMERS
79. output 4 gt SSSXP40 lt The safe engine turn off process can be skipped Although is highly unrec ommended at any time you can directly drive output 4 high making the unit turn the engine off without any previous time speed safe condition Driving a vehicle s engine OFF without knowing its state is ex Warning tremely dangerous 5 9 Improving the periodic report The example we have been working so far uses a time only criteria for the periodic tracking report event 37 This report is being generated every 5 minutes 24 7 This includes a lot of useless reports that show the same location and conditions when the vehicle remains stationary A better ap proach is to use all three parameters that define the Time And Distance signal Our actual definition of the T amp D signal 8 which is the signal that trig gers the periodic tracking event 37 is gt STD80300 lt As you can check with the TD message definition given on the TAIP ref erence this is a time only criterion which causes the TD8 signal to get high on a 5 minutes basis To achieve a better reporting event the T amp D criterion has to include all three configuration parameters e Minimum time e Distance threshold e Maximum time These definitions depend strongly of each user s situation and it is a matter of cost vs frequency of report Typical values for vehicles moving in a city are e Minimum time between reports 2 minutes DCT 153
80. output so a ve hicle s engine is only turned off when a safe speed condition exists For this example let s set an under speed condition of 15mph with a time condition of 16 seconds Let s assume the ignition cutter is wired to output CY 148 zz 4 A command received locally or over the air 5 8 SAFE ENGINE TURN OFF 4 We can also add an event to report when the output is actually set i e the ignition is cut let s use event code 13 for this We continue working on the same example worked so far 5 8 1 Create the speed limit 5 8 2 Creating a timer We set 15mph on the S01 limit gt GS0110150 lt We only want to cut the engine after the unit is instructed to do so To do this we use a User Signal This type of signal gets high or low whenever we tell it to For this example let us use user signal 00 U00 Now we create a silent event that starts a 16 seconds timer whenever the vehicle s speed falls off 15mph AND the user signal is set that it is when someone activates the user signal to indicate that the safe engine turn off process is to start gt SED14SV0 S01 U00 amp ACT SGCO2TCO0016 lt We use event 14 and counter 02 for no particular reason 5 8 3 Cutting the ignition Now we create a non silent event that sets the ignition OFF when the pre vious set counter reaches its threshold value of 16 seconds gt SED13NV5 CO2U00 amp ACT SSSXP41 lt The DA of this event is 5 meaning that t
81. s 19V UO e pod jeuas y pajas nuaw og wwo ayi UD P MOU 31 3334110 133134405 ZEZ SY GSN ue Suisn y q TU S0 40 saueguy Speal PIa UOISISA BY FEY WLJUOJ 4 PAY q 07 splaty q UE UOISISA SY 104 JIEM pue uong serejuy Woy peasy 1514 34194203 78 03 payppauuo st pun ay ajJempyos Oy uado gt spod jeuas sasn zey uogezndde Aue asoy e LINN JHL OL LdIYOS JHL SSVd 34 ayy anes a gt Gp LZ WOI 4818s AROODOdO VXS lt entes JAY Gp 17 woas ayy buey P T gt Woyaweu J LJed JAUISULWYYS lt NdY wo gt aweu 1311185 73U 3341 ay aSuey 2 NId 0U 40 gt I4H5 lt 3sn 10 gt pEZLIJUS lt Nid SPIe gt WIS pEz1 34 buey q gt 1dWVWX30IS lt 4no 404 QI 31dWwx3 34 aSuey e pue pedajou yy smopul 29111 oppa xa e yua ayy ydus wuy papey ay vado 1dIY9S AHL 1SAFAV LI03 Z LINN JHL HLIM JLVJINNWWOD t vq 1u1 2 panes aq 11M a14 341 8918 JO 314 ayy Bures usyma papas st sy 114 auns ayey siasn pedazou 104 uoIsuayxe 1003 ayy 5u uvuasaud aweu zuaruaauon 48470 ue JO uy PSHEISUI ISD e 3 Y Sy AAS 9 al aly Py mau ayy uo Y asd pue xipuaddy du25 papeys 541130 Jen ueyy 5 185 gs SUEUY ayy jo juajuo ayy AdoD q ay idwa mau e 338313 pue soppa xa uwd Jay10 Aue Jo weiBoud pedajou y smopuy vado e das xau ay 07 paarosd ayu dus fury pa3103580330 ay aroy Appay D nok Jj 1dIYIS GALYVLS ONILLAS L Enuey saasn Jo ay ydus 403 p
82. signal is true when there is a voice call on course VO1 to VO5 are true whenever the actual voice call is being held to Destination Point 10 to 14 respectively See the VC VE and XADP messages XP1 XP4 Outputs True when the corresponding output is on See the SS mes sage CT 297 Antares SB does not have GPIOs These signals are maintained for backwards compatibility with scripts from other versions Instead Antares SB has 4 inputs and 4 outputs Signals G00 G03 are the same as IP1 IP4 signals and G04 G07 signals are the same as XP1 XP4 signals The user is encouraged to use IP and XP signals instead of G signals These signals state can be directly altered by the user with the SS TAIP message Refer to the next paragraph The signals marked with a are signals for which the conditions that set them true or false are defined by the user The other signals transitions criteria can not be altered as they depend on conditions already programmed on the unit For more information on signals refer to the Configuration chapter Event Ma chine section 298 z_ O 10 Appendix D Quick TAIP reference This chapter presents quick examples of the most commonly used TAIP com mands Refer to the Unit s TAIP reference chapter for detailed information on a command 10 1 Setting the Antares SB ID To set the unit s ID to AbcD 1234 send gt SIDAbcD 1234 lt 10
83. tinations meaning that the maximum holding capacity is always restricted to the free space left by the destination with the maximum accumulated reports The buffering capacity may be significantly lowered by a miss configured or permanently unreachable Destination The buffer is automatically controlled by the unit according to the situ ations described above and whenever the conditions change for good the unit starts emptying the buffer as messages are successfully transmitted to destinations The state for the buffer for a given Destination can be consulted with the XASF message 13 The UDP acknowledging mechanism is optional and can be turned off on DCT 70 G 3 13 GPS Back Log 3 13 GPS BACK LOG A log with up to to the last minute of GPS information can be retrieved at any time Combined with acceleration signals to monitor negative acceler ations that can occur on possible crash conditions the Back Log enables a minute by minute examination of the vehicle s location and speed prior to the incident The GPS Back Log is retrieved with the XAKL message If no index is given 60 GPS messages are sent A minor number can be specified to retrieve less data For example to retrieve the last 20 GPS information messages send to the unit gt QXAKLO020 lt To combine this with a large negative acceleration condition see the Us ing Acceleration Signals section on the Configuration chapter For more
84. to turn ON OFF the voice call number validation per formed by the unit on incoming voice calls It defaults to ON meaning that the calling party s number has to be defined on any of the Telephone type destinations in order for the unit to accept the call If set to OFF the unit will answer any incoming voice call regardless of the calling party s number being set or not on the Telephone type destinations space The message has the following format Chars Item Format Value Meaning Use Call ID A 0 1 Use 1 for turning on voice call identification de fault value Use 0 for turning off voice call identi fication The access flag of the Destination has to indicate that voice calls are allowed from that number too CT 283 Y 6 82 XAVM MICROPHONE GAIN 6 82 XAVM Microphone gain Qualifiers S R Q This command is used to change the microphone gain for voice calls A Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action value A 0 9 Gain value 0 9 or gain action to increase to decrease Default value is 5 Example to set the microphone gain to 8 gt SXAVM8 lt To rise the gain one level gt SXAVM lt To lower the gain one level gt SXAVM lt 284 A O 6 83 XAVO VIRTUAL ODOMETER 6 83 XAVO Virtual Odometer Qualifiers S Q R Use this message to consult t
85. two parameters are DCT 90 M O 4 2 ENABLING THE UNIT ON GSM AND GPRS required The SIM card s user PIN and the cellular operator APN Access Point Name 4 2 1 SIM Card s PIN for GSM registration Note Note This parameter is optional because it depends on how the SIM card is con figured Most cellular operators distribute no pin SIM cards so you don t have to worry about this parameter or you can explicitly set it to empty if you are unsure of a previous configuration But if your SIM card requires a PIN this parameters has to be set or else the unit will fail to register on GSM The configuration message for the SIM card s PIN is the RF message You can check the TAIP reference for more information but the command s use is as follows To set the PIN number 1234 send to the unit gt SRFI1234 lt To set an empty PIN gt SRFI lt Use the Q qualifier to consult A PIN configuration can be issued at any time but although the registra tion process is always done automatically the unit will take up some time on registering to the GSM network when a previous erroneous PIN was given or when no PIN was not given So it is recommended in those cases to reset the unit after the PIN set command with the gt SRT lt reset message Or better have the PIN correctly configured before the SIM card is inserted The Antares SB does not block a SIM card when the given PIN is wrong The GSM re
86. type destination and the Access parameter on the DP defi nition has to indicate that an incoming call from that DP is to be answered 5 4 1 Make the unit accept a phone call To do so the Access parameter on the corresponding DP has to indicated voice call access In our previous example the 912345678 Phone Number was defined with the XADP messages as follows gt SXADP1010912345678 lt The Access is such that voice calls from that number are to be answered Any incoming call from the 912345678 is now going to be answered The voice call is maintained until the 912345678 decides to hung up For more information on the Access parameter see the XADP message 5 4 2 Have the unit initiate a voice call This can be done manually by using the XAVC message To initiate a voice call to the Phone Number defined on the Adding SMS reporting example send to the unit gt SXAVC10 lt The unit returns immediately gt RXAVC10 lt Indicating it has accepted the command and that the voice call dial up has initiated No failure success indication is thrown at a later time To monitor the voice call the fixed voice signals have to be used To end the voice call send gt SXAVE lt DCT 139 Y 5 5 Ignition detection 5 5 1 Script 5 5 IGNITION DETECTION The unit can also be programmed to start the voice call automatically by using an event s user action field Continuing with our previous example the event 05 definition can
87. value Back up battery level e Number of GPS satellites in view GPRS GSM network state Short Cell ID information Full Cell ID information Vehicle s information based on OBD parameters e Virtual Odometer value e Region report information The information tags are messages separated by the symbol They are displayed after the Source and Age fields of the EV message and the last of the tags is the D tag which has always been present on every unit s report One example of such a report is gt REV381447147349 2578250 0802813900000012 AC 000 AL 02595 SV 08 ID EXAMPLE lt One extended message can contain one extra tag or it can contain all avail able tags The user decides which tags the unit must add to an EV message For information on how to make the unit generate Extended EV Messages see the Configuration chapter and the XAEF and ED messages 3 11 2 Responses to TAIP Commands Messages Since Firmware 5 21 the unit allows the report of response generated by a TAIP command included on an event s user action This enables the unit to auto query a TAIP command based on the Event Machine and have the response to the command reported to any destination s This feature broads the reporting possibilities of the unit as the reporting messages are not only restricted to the information contained on the EV and ET messages Any information that can only be known by means of a TAIP consult can be con
88. which is suitable for a Time And Distance report An example of using these messages to define a signal Defining the speed signal S06 to be true whenever the vehicle s speed ex ceeds 55mph and false whenever the speed is below gt 5G50610550 lt Now the speed signal S06 can be used on an event s definition to gener ate a report every time the vehicle exceeds 55mph gt SED33NT3 SO6 lt We just defined event 33 to send an ET report to DA 3 every time the S06 signal switches from false to true that s what the sign does The report will only be generated once In order for the event to trigger again the S06 signal has to become false first and then true again This means that the speed excess is going to be reported every time the speed goes from anything less than 55mph to a larger value but not every time the speed remains at the larger value 106 y O 4 5 5 Examples Example Example 4 6 USING POLYGONAL REGIONS Some examples about the use of the event machine are presented next For complete examples containing both the Event Machine and the other parameters necessary to get the unit working refer to the Scenarios and Examples chapter To understand the events configuration format refer to the ED message on the TAIP reference Configuring two events on the Event Machine to generate an ignition report The ignition ON event may be defined as gt SED18NV4 FOO lt And the Ignition OFF event
89. 00 49 99 Index of the second left neighbor of the left neigh actual point Use 99 to leave this field bor 2 empty Check the explanation after this table The Antares SB has the ability to detect whether a vehicle is inside or outside of a user defined polygon In order to achieve this the point s nu meration must follow the next rule The points must be numerated starting on 0 and going up to a maximum of 49 in ascending order according to each point s longitude If two or more points share the same longitude their index ordering is not relevant If the polygon were drawn with the geographical north pointing upwards this rule will be achieved by numerating the points from left to right CY 185 Y 1 A polygon is defined by a minimum of three points 6 13 GR REGIONS A point is formed by the region s index the point s index the point s latitude and longitude and by other two parameters called the left neighbors The left neighbors of a point are the indexes of the points connected if any with a line to the actual point and have a longitude value equal to or less than the actual point s longitude When the actual point has no left neighbors there are no connected points with the same or less longitude these two parameters take the value of 99 each as there is no point with 99 as index 6 13 1 Special cases e When the actual point has only one left neighbor the first parameter tak
90. 00 and PCS1900 30 dBm 2dB at ambient temperature Minimum output power EGSM and GSM850 5 dBm 5dB at ambient temperature Minimum output power GSM1800 and PCS1900 0 dBm 5dB at ambient temperature DCT 35 y 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS 1 5 9 GPS module Units with firmware version 1 05 e Sensitivity 152 dBm Tracking 142 dBm Acquisition e Protocol TAIP ASCI e Frequency L1 type 1575 42 MHz C A code Channels 12 channel simultaneous operation e Update rate 1Hz Accuracy Horizontal lt 3 meters 50 lt 8 meters 90 Altitude lt 10 meters 50 lt 16 meters 90 Velocity 0 06 m sec PPS 50 nanoseconds Acquisition Reacquisition 2 sec Hot Start 9 sec Warm Start 35 sec Cold Start TTFF 39 sec Out of the box 41 sec Units with firmware version 2 01 e Supports SBAS WAAS EGNOS e Sensitivity 150 dBm Tracking 142 dBm Acquisition e Protocol TAIP ASCI Frequency L1 type 1575 42 MHz C A code Channels 12 channel simultaneous operation e Update rate 1Hz Accuracy Horizontal lt 2 5 meters 50 lt 5 meters 90 SBAS lt 2 meters 50 lt 4 meters 90 Altitude lt 5 meters 50 lt 8 meters 90 SBAS lt 3 meters 50 lt 5 meters 90 Velocity 0 06 m sec PPS 100 nanoseconds RMS Acquisition Reacquisition 2 sec 36 z G 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS Hot Start 3 1 sec Warm Start 35 4 s
91. 01 lt For more information see the DA message The reporting criteria depends solely on the Event Machine configuration and on the parameters that controls how signals used by the events triggers change Events routing options allow the generation of reports to several destinations including IP addresses phone numbers thru SMSs and the unit s serial port for accessories like PDAs To understand how reporting configuration is done refer to the next section called Event Machine that teaches on how to tell the unit the what where and when of the user defined reports The reporting messages generated by the Event Machine to the Destina tions are the TAIP messages EV and ET These messages contain among other GPS related information the event code generating the report For information on these messages refer to the TAIP reference For SMS destinations the EV and ET TAIP messages are used when an AVL application has access to a SMS server system capable of receiving the message and analyze it in the same way as does when it comes from an IP channel When the SMS destination is not an AVL server but a person s phone number a user defined text message associated to an event code can be configured to be sent instead of the not user friendly TAIP message To do so the XATM message is used and the Destination Point configuration has to be altered to tell the unit to use user messages on a given DP instead of TAIP reporting messa
92. 1 XAOR FUEL RATE THRESHOLDS 6 61 XAOR Fuel Rate thresholds Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure the fuel rate thresholds associated to the OR signals This fuel rate thresholds are presented in Gallons per hour The message has the following format ABCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Index A 0 4 Threshold index 1 Action B flag 1 Sets the threshold U Deletes the threshold 5 Fuel level CC 00 30 Fuel Level threshold Gallons per hour For example to set Fuel rate threshold 1 to 5 gallons per hour use gt SXAOR1105 lt Now to generate an event when the Fuel consumption goes above 5 gallons per hour gt SED34NVO OR1 lt 260 Y 6 62 Q R 6 62 XAOS OBD STATUS CONSULT XAOS OBD Status Consult Qualifiers Use this message to consult the Vehicle Interface Antares communication state the vehicle s supported OBD variables and the OBD variables values The mes sage has the following format A B CC DDD EE FFF Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Consult Type A 0 1 0 Ask the Communication state and if the communication is working get the supported parameters 1 Same as 0 but if communication is work ing add the OBD variables current values 1 Communication B 0 5 Status status 0 Serial Port not in OBD mode The user has not enter gt SMTO lt 1 Initia
93. 1 to 10 characters long OBD Re lated OI AAA Trip Odometer in 1 miles 1 to 10 characters long OBD Related VO AAA Virtal Odometer value 1 to 10 characters long RE ABCC Region Event A Unit entered region O Unit left region B Type of Region K Circular region R Polygonal region CC Region Index The extended EV messages are generated with events that use as Message ID one of the extended EV formats A B or C For more information refer to the ED and XAEF messages 178 CT 6 9 GC COUNTERS TIMERS DISTANCERS 6 9 GC Counters Timers Distancers Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure and manipulate internal counters Each counter can be configured as a user controlled counter a timer or a dis tancer counter updated by the traveled distance For more information refer to the Configuration chapter Using Counters section The message has the following format AAB C DDDDD EEEEE Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Counter AA 00 19 Specifies one of the counters that it is ID associated with a counter signal CAA The counter signal becomes True when the specified threshold value is reached If the Recycle Flag is set to R then the signal transitions back to False If the Recycle Flag is set to C the signal will remain True 1 Command B See A counter can be configured in one Counter
94. 10 REMOTE HOST SOFTWARE queries or commands to the unit s Depending on the communication mechanism the unit uses to com municate with the AVL server some requirements have to be fulfilled See the next sections for information on this 3 10 1 Working with TCP In order for the unit to start connecting to an AVL server an IP type Destination has to be configured first The configuration flag for this Destination must indicate a TCP host Refer to the Destinations section on the Configuration chapter These are the general requirements for an AVL server working with units on TCP 1 The AVL server has to be able to work as a TCP server as the Antares SB is always going to initiate the TCP connection acting as TCP client Technically speaking for this to happen the AVL server has to be able to open a TCP socket on listening mode on an available port The port number has to be the same port number used on the unit s IP type Destination and it has to be clear of any Firewall NAT and or router restriction The AVL server has to create a new listening TCP socket when ever the actual listening socket passes to open state this to assure that a new connection coming from another unit is ac cepted The server should close idle open connections after a minimum time of 1 hour The server should not use a keep alive mechanism Using the unit s keep alive option or a periodical report event are the pre ferred
95. 13 to 051 Received Signal Strength Indicates the power of the received signal See explanation at the end of the section Check the following table to see the relation between RSSI and RSS 197 DoT 6 20 RP REGISTRATION PARAMETERS CELLULAR NETWORK RSSI RSS csm dBm 0 to 7 113 99 Very poor 8 to 13 97 87 Poor 14 to 17 85 79 Fair 18 to 20 77 73 Fair 21 to 24 71 65 Good 25 to 31 63 51 Excellent 198 6 21 RT RESET MESSAGE 6 21 RT Reset message Qualifiers S R When this message is issued alone the unit performs a system reset When used with qualifiers it serves multiple internal initializations purposes The message has the following format CONFIG SIGNALS Qualifier Meaning SFBUFF Deletes the contents of the S amp F buffer CONFIG Resets almost all the configuration of the unit The preserved parameters are PIN APN ID Destination Points IMEI as ID This prevents loosing communication over the air with the unit In order to delete absolutely all off the unit s parameters use the ALL option ALL Resets all of the configuration of the unit This option can not be used over the air 199 Y 6 22 SS SIGNAL STATUS 6 22 SS Signal Status Qualifiers Q S R This message allows for the inspection of signals state and the setting of outputs and other
96. 2 Setting the APN To set the APN to internet carrier com send gt SRFAinternet carrier com lt 10 3 Configuring the SIM card PIN To set the PIN to 1234 send gt SRFI1234 lt To set the PIN as empty send gt SRFI lt 10 4 Restarting the unit To make a software and hardware reset on the unit gt SRT lt 10 5 Restoring to factory defaults To erase the configuration and restore to factory initial values gt SRT ALL lt The unit will make a software reset after restoring the factory defaults 10 6 RESETING THE GPRS CONNECTION 10 6 Reseting the GPRS connection To reset the GPRS connection send gt SXAGP1 lt The until will close the GPRS session and will automatically start it again af ter approximately 1 minute 10 7 Configuring a host address type To set IP address 192 168 0 1 working on TCP port 8000 on Destination Point 00 send gt SXADP0001192 168 0 1 8000 lt To set the same IP port on UDP without confirmation send gt SXADP0002192 168 0 1 8000 lt To set the same IP port on UDP with confirmation send gt SXADP0003192 168 0 1 8000 lt To set the host name server name com rather than an IP address On TCP gt SXADPOOO1server name com 8000 lt On UDP without confirmation gt SXADPOOO2server name com 8000 lt On UDP with confirmation gt SXADPOOO3server name com 8000 lt To delete host address 00 send gt SXADPOOU lt To delete telephone 10 send gt SXADP10U lt
97. 22k a ee eae ee 150 5 8 7 Operation 000002 eee 152 Improving the periodic report 153 DOLL Seript o ss 2 6 kA pos Ak a aR ee 154 Reconnection event for TCP 157 510 1 Seript 2 22 86 how a ee 157 Main power loss alarm 00 004 160 5 11 1 Script gt sasas ee ee 160 Using the sleep mode oaoa a 160 Configuring reading a distance counter 161 Generating an extended EV report 161 13 860 Contents 6 Unit s TAIP reference 163 6 1 AL Altitude 50 5 9 ee be A A OR ee ae ge 164 6 2 CP Compact Position 24 43 2544 ee eeu e 165 6 3 DA Destination Address 166 6 3 1 Examples oci sos ev aces e Re ee ee 167 6 4 DP Destination Point circa Re es 168 6 5 ED Event Definition 170 6 5 1 Examples 200 172 6 6 ER Error Report 2 224 444 4 24 as 174 6 6 1 Example sa soso pac o e 174 6 7 ET Event Report time only message 175 6 8 EV Event Message 24 426 64 eb a a 176 6 9 GC Counters Timers Distancers 179 6 9 1 Counters commands 180 6 9 2 Examples e 180 6 10 GF GPIOS function I O osaa aaa 182 6 11 GS Speed Limit oaa a 183 6 12 GT Time Window aoaaa 184 6 13 GR Regions lt a a 185 6 13 1 Special cases a 186 6 13 2 Regions creation examples 186 6 14 ID Identifi
98. 3 Status BBB 100 104 100 Active status The Stop is active The value of Index will correspond to the cur rent position of the Stop in the list 101 Done status The Stop is marked as Done The value of Index will correspond to the current position of the Stop in the list 102 Unread Inactive The Stop has not been read and it is inactive The value of Index will correspond to the current position of the Stop in the list 103 Read Inactive The Stop has been read but it is inactive The value of Index will correspond to the current position of the Stop in the list 104 Deleted The Stop has been deleted The Garmin device will return this sta tus for any Stop that is not present in the Stop list The value of Index will be set as and it should be ignored by the server 3 Index CCC 0 255 Position of the Stop in the Garmin s Stop List E G To send a Stop Message to the Garmin device send gt SXAGMS0001244753308 0307600189 0957793861DCT lt Antares will respond to confirm that the Stop Message was received like this gt RXAGMS0001244753308 0307600189 0957793861DCT lt To consult the status of the Stop Message with ID 000 send gt QXAGMSO000 lt Antares will respond like this gt RXAGMSS000102000 lt Is the Stop Message has not been read and is inactive Or it could respond gt RXAGMSS000103000 lt If the message has been read but is inactive 6 42 9 XAGMCS Garmin Mode Change Stop Message Status Qualifiers
99. 6 79 XAVC VOICE CALL START This command is used to initiate a voice call with a Telephone type Destination Point DPs 10 to 14 Two optional fields are provided to specify a retry number and a time between retries for failing calls The unit will start to dial as soon as this command is entered and the selected Destination is found to have any value set a telephone number The message has the following format AA BCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Destination AA 10 14 Index of the Destination Point which holds the num Point ber to dial 1 Retry attempts B 1 9 Number of call attempts before giving up dialing Defaults to 1 2 Retry delay CC 5 99 sec Time between successive retries Defaults to 5 sec onds onds See the Adding Voice Interaction example on the Scenarios And Examples chapter for more information 281 e G 6 80 XAVE VOICE CALL END 6 80 XAVE Voice Call End Qualifiers S R Use this message to hang up any current voice call If no voice call is being held the command returns error 65 gt RER65 SXAVE gt The message has the following format No parameters Send gt SXAVE lt The unit immediately returns gt RXAVE lt Ending any current voice call 282 y O 6 81 XAVI VOICE CALL IDENTIFICATION SWITCH 6 81 XAVI Voice Call Identification switch Qualifiers S R Q This command is used
100. 9 No network 10 13 Internal error 20 Closing 88 99 GPRS set up failure 1 Destination C 0 9 IP type destination point index for which D and EEE give Point information 1 Socket State D 0 2 Socket State of the DP indicated by C 0 Closed 1 Opening 2 Open 3 Retries EEE Socket open retries for the given DP Example the following response gt RXANS106 02000 10000 20000 31040 40000 52000 61001 70000 80000 92000 lt Indicates The GPRS session is UP The TCP socket with Destination Points 0 5 and 9 is open e The TCP socket with Destination Points 1 2 4 7 and 8 is closed The connection with DP 3 and 6 is in opening process 256 Y 6 58 XAOE ENGINE S RPM THRESHOLDS 6 58 XAOE Engine s RPM thresholds Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure the RPM threshold levels associated to the OE signals The message has the following format ABCCCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Index A 0 4 Threshold index 1 Action B flag 1 Sets the threshold U Deletes the threshold 5 RPM Value CCCCC Integer RPM threshold value From 00000 to 16384 RPM For example to set RPM threshold 3 to 5000 RPM use gt SXADE3105000 lt Now to generate an event when such RPM threshold is exceeded gt SED30NVO DE3 lt 257 y 6 59 XAOF Fuel Level percentage values Qualifiers Q S R 6 59
101. AOOOAcknowledged lt Antares will respond to confirm that the canned message was stored like this gt RXAGMTAOOOAcknowledged lt XAGMTD Garmin Mode Delete Canned Message Qualifiers S R To delete canned messages from the Garmin device use the TD modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 This message has the following format 240 DCY 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Message ID AAA 0 120 ID of the canned message to be deleted For example to delete the canned message with ID 000 send gt SXAGMTDOOO0 lt Antares will respond to confirm that the canned message was deleted like this gt RXAGMTDOOO lt 6 42 14 XAGMX Delete Fleet Management Protocol Related Data Qualifiers S R To delete any data related to the Fleet Management Protocol on the Garmin device use the X modifier This message uses the following format A Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action A Flag 0 Delete all stops 1 Delete all text messages 2 Delete the active navigation route 3 Delete all canned messages 4 Delete all canned replies 5 Not in use 6 Delete all Driver ID and Driver Status information T Delete all data related to the Fleet Management Protocol This flag will also disable the Fleet Management Interface on the Garmin device and will disable th
102. ART STOP MONITORING Ignition sense Speed violation and warning Now we have to tell the unit what is a STOP and what is a START There are several ways of doing this for this example we are going to define a STOP situation to be when the vehicle s speed remains below a small speed limit for a given period of time Having this we define the START situa tion as happening when the vehicle speed s goes beyond the same limit and having the unit on a previous STOP condition In this way we can assure that a STOP is not going to be reported any time the vehicle s speed falls below a low value but that a time condition is also required We require the following two parameters 1 An speed limit for determinating an STOP START This has to be a low value but not so low that the vehicle has the chance of moving extremely low and not having the reports 2 A time condition This value depends on what is an STOP situation for us A vehicle may be at rest waiting for a traffic light to change and we may not want that situation to be reported as an STOP For our example let s use some typical values that work on the majority of configurations For speed limit let s use 8mph and as time condition 2 minutes For our example let s use for no particular reason event 30 for an STOP situation and event 31 for the START 5 7 1 Setting a low speed limit 5 7 2 Start a counter Using the GS signal we configure the 8mph limit gt 5G50310080 lt W
103. Altitude In put Outputs state and number of satellites in view whenever the input 1 is activated b 7 172 lO Example Reporting another extended EV reporting message Binary form of the EV message Example Send an Event Message in binary form 6 5 ED EVENT DEFINITION gt SED23NA0 IP1 lt Define the extended EV message A with the desired information tags gt SXAEFA AL I0 SV lt Following the previous example create another event that generates an extended EV report including the state of distance counter 12 whenever the vehicle is turned off gt SED24NB0 F00 lt gt SXAEFB CV12 lt The binary form of Antares EV messages is configured by simply using X as the Message ID qualifier in the event definition ED It is impor tant to note that the Destination Address of the messages must contain an IP type Destination Point and that the destination server must be config ured to decode the binary messages Application notes AN0020EN and AN0021EN explains the binary form and a method to decode the binary messages sent by Antares SB that can be implemented in any server Both application notes can be found at http www digitalcomtech com support html Send an Event Message in binary form when an input gets active gt SED41NX0 IP4 lt This definition will make the unit send an EV Event Message in binary form with code 41 every time the input 4 becomes true For this example it is as
104. B The Inputs are connected inter nally to several protection circuits including over voltage protection among others The maximum input voltage is 32V The electrical conditions for the ignition input are State Voltage range Ignition ON 5 8V to 32V Ignition OFF OV to 4 8V or Open 43 a G 2 4 Outputs 2 4 OUTPUTS This detection is different than inputs The ignition detection circuit is different than inputs Any voltage above 5 8V on the ignition input will be detected as ignition ON Anything below 4 8 will be detected as ignition OFF Under this conditions this input is designed to be connected to the ignition s key position that closes the circuit between the battery s positive voltage and the vehicle s electrical system It should not be connected to the start position which gives energy to the vehicle s start engine as this position is ON only for a short period of time The unit s ignition sense can be directly connected to the electrical end of this position See the Connection Diagrams section for an illustration It is normal to see a 3 4V approx voltage on the Antares SB ignition input when nothing is conencted to them This voltage is set on pur pose through a pull up circuit 50kOhm resistors in order to fix a inactive state when there is nothing connected to the ignition input The ignition imput is connected internally to several protection cir cuits including
105. BBBBBBBBCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Change ID AAAAAAAAAA 1 9999999999 This counter increases everytime the Driver ID changes The starting value is 1 10 Time of BBBBBBBBBB Seconds Time when the change was made Is the change number of seconds since 12 00 am Decem ber 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 20 Driver ID CCC Varies Driver s ID For example Antares SB will send the following message when the Driver ID is changed on the Garmin device gt RTXGMKI00000000020620232668AuthorizedDriver2 ID Test lt TXGMKS Garmin Mode Change Driver Status Unsolicited This message will be sent by Antares SB each time the user changes the Driver Status on the Garmin device This message has the following format AAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Change ID AAAAAAAAAA 1 9999999999 This counter increases everytime the Driver ID changes The starting value is 1 10 Time of BBBBBBBBBB Seconds Time when the change was made Is the change number of seconds since 12 00 am Decem ber 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 10 Status ID CCCCCCCCCC 1 16 Status ID to be set For example Antares SB
106. BBCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Change ID AAAAAAAAAA 1 4294967295 This counter increases everytime the Driver ID changes The starting value is 1 10 Time of BBBBBBBBBB Seconds Time when the change was made Is the change number of seconds since 12 00 am Decem ber 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 20 Driver ID CCC Varies Driver s ID max For example to set a new Driver ID use the following message gt SXAGMKI00000000010620229003AuthorizedDriver lt Antares SB will respond like this to confirm that the Driver ID was set gt RXAGMKI00000000010620229003AuthorizedDriver ID Test lt To query the current Driver ID set on the Garmin device use this message gt QXAGMKI lt Antares SB will respond like this gt RXAGMKI00000000010620229003AuthorizedDriver ID Test lt 6 42 3 XAGMKSA Garmin Mode Add Driver Status Qualifiers Q S R To add a new Driver Status on the Garmin device use the KSA modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 It is possible to store up to 16 Driver Status This message uses the following format AAAAAAAAAABBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Driver Sta AAAAAAAAAA 0 4294967295 This is the ID used to identify each Driver tus ID Status on the list This message o
107. Code report 1 Event C flag Message routing Handling N Normal Route the Event Message to the specified Destination Address DA X Serial Port Route the Event Message to the unit s serial port only 1 Message D flag Generate event message ID V EV message T ET message O Orbcomm s SC Originated Default Message 1 Destination E 0 9 Destination Address where the report will be Address sent For example to define the Region ID report using the event code 00 that will report both when the unit goes In or Out from a region use the following configuration message gt SXAREBOONVO lt A report generated when the unit entered the circular region 10 would be gt REV001524377378 0475230 0740249100000012 RE IK10 ID test lt A report generated when the unit left the polygonal region 20 would be gt REV001524377378 0475230 0740249100000012 RE 0R20 ID test lt For more information on the Region ID reports refer to the XARE TAIP message CY 269 zi G 6 68 XASD DESTINATIONS SET 6 68 XASD Destinations Set Qualifiers Q R Use this message to query which Destination Points and Destination Addresses are set on the unit This is useful for knowing which DPs and DAs are defined preventing a one by one query with the XADP and DA messages The message has the following format It returns a string which contains a P plus a two digit number for each DP set and an A plus a two di
108. D message 17 Invalid Destination Address query See the DA message 18 Invalid Destination Point query See the XADP message 19 Invalid index 20 Message can not be used with D qualifier See the Introduction Chapter 21 SRT ALL can only be used locally Use the serial port 22 The unit is restarting and it can not process any command 23 Minimum time date can not be ahead of Maximum time date on a Time Window Time Window can not be less than 2 minutes 24 Invalid characters on string parameter 25 Invalid vehicle ID See the ID message 26 PIN can only be modified locally Use the serial port 27 APN can not be changed via IP communication Use serial port or SMS messages 28 Unrecognized RF parameter See the RF message 29 RF parameter longitude exceeded See the RF message 30 Set messages are locked for the serial port See the XALL message 31 Wrong unlocking code See the XALL message 32 Invalid MDT PAD Size See the MT message 33 Invalid MT format See the MT message 34 Invalid MDT PAD Timeout See the MT message 35 Event definition space exeeded See the ED message Try dividing a long event into several cascading events using event signals and user signals 36 Event sense missing on event definition See the ED message 37 Non existent signal on event definition See the ED message and Signals Chapter 38 PAD1 or PAD2 must differ from PAD escape and PAD entry See the MT
109. DDD EEEE degrees Longitude in the WGS 84 datum Positive values indicate an eastern longitude 1 Data D Data Data acquisition mode in effect Source Source when acquiring CP data Table 1 Data Age E flag Age of available data 0 Not available 1 Old 10 seconds 2 Fresh lt 10 seconds 165 Y 6 3 DA DESTINATION ADDRESS 6 3 DA Destination Address Qualifiers Q S R A Destination Address is an association of Destination Points These allows an event defined with the ED message to be routed to multiple receivers at the same time by selecting the Destination Address or group that holds all of the desired destinations IP types Telephones Serial Port A Destina tion Address is not the actual IP address or SMS telephone of the receivers The message has the following format A PBB PBB PBB PBB A is the Destination Address index Its range goes from 0 to 9 Remem ber that a Destination Address is a group or an association of Destination Points A Destination Point see XADP message is the actual TP address or telephone of a destination B holds a Destination Point s index You can select multiple Destination Points by separating them with a or you can select a range with a 166 PS 6 3 DA DESTINATION ADDRESS 6 3 1 Examples Creating DAs e To create Destination Address 5 as an association of Destination Points 2 3 10 and 15 15 is the unit s serial
110. ID 0000 lt Once you are able to communicate you can start interacting with the unit s TAIP console refer to the TAIP console section on this chapter for more information The unit s four LEDs are functional all the time DCT 49 G 3 2 1 Power Red 3 2 2 Signal Orange 3 2 LEDS This LED is solid ON whenever the unit is functional OFF when it has no main or back up power Any time the LED is blinking the unit is in a temporal state where some features are not available These temporal states may be reached when e Initializing This state lasts 15 seconds and is reached any time the unit is recovering from a non power situation or recovering from a previous system reset If the unit remains in this state for a longer time you may have a hardware problem In this state the unit s TAIP console will not respond to commands Signing off the GSM GPRS network Before a system reset the unit signs off the network this procedure takes from 3 to 10 seconds This procedure is also done before entering sleep mode e On sleep mode The LED blinks very shortly on a 4 seconds basis There is one exception for this type of situations when the LED is blinking e The Power LED is blinking at unison with the Signal LED This does not indicate a temporal lack of functionality but SIM card s initialization This is a temporary state that should not last more than 6 seconds and it may only happen after a system re
111. IP reference chapter e The EV message gives information on the event code time date position velocity heading and GPS quality at the moment of the event occurrence Here it is an example of such a Reporting Message for event 00 gt REV001447147509 2578250 0802813901519512 ID EXAMPLE lt For detailed information on this message refer to the EV message on the Unit s TAIP reference chapter When configuring the Event Machine on each event definition the user decides what Reporting Message the event shall generate For information on events configuration refer to the Event Machine sec tion of the Configuration chapter Since Firmware Version 5 21 the unit supports the addition of in formation tags to the EV reporting message so that more information can be included on an event s report 11 For detailed information on the Event Machine see the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter 12 Reporting messages can be send to TCP and UDP hosts to mobile numbers via SMS and to the unit s serial port 68 y 3 11 REPORTS MESSAGES The Extended Reporting Messages Extended EV When using an Extended Reporting EV Message extra tags are added at the end of the standard EV message presented above These tags allow the addition of information on e Inputs and Outputs state e Counters values Timers and distance counters e Vehicle s acceleration e Altitude AMSL Analog to Digital Converter
112. MOTE HOST SOFTWARE When waiting for confirmation the unit expects its ID on an UDP datagram coming from the remote server every time it sends a report The unit sends the report gt REV2300000000000000000000000000000000090 ID AB12 lt After receiving this the AVL software must send back just the unit s ID AB12 Otherwise the unit will keep on sending the same message waiting for a confirmation The timeout retry mechanism for UDP with confirmation when no confirmation is received is as follows Four retries are sent at a 10 seconds interval then 6 retires are sent at a 1 minute rate interval Then no more sends for about 6 more minutes After that the mech anism restarts 3 10 3 Working with SMS Antares SB may use Telephone Number Destinations to send its report or to give TAIP console access via SMS messages The Destina tion may be configured to send user defined event messages intended to be read by a person with a cellular phone or similar The Phone Number Destination may be configured so the unit does not send its report as user defined messages but as TAIP messages the same way as it is done with IP Type or serial port destinations This enables an AVL server with the capacity of receiving sending SMS to work with the unit in the same manner as it is done via IP An AVL server may have SMS communication capacity by using a SMPP system or a GSM modem connected trhu a USB or serial port For information on
113. No PIN set i Starting 6 7 9 1 GSM status F 0 5 GSM status 0 Not registered not searching 1 Registered home network 2 Not registered searching 3 Registration denied 4 Unknown 5 Registered roaming 2 RSSI GG 00 31 Received Signal Strength Indicator 1 GPRS Attach H flag 1 indicates that the unit is GPRS attached 0 indicates GPRS de attached state 1 GPRS state l 0 9 GPRS state 0 Initializing 2 Idle 4 Dialing 6 Connected Ready T No APN 8 Stopped 9 No network E Error Use QXANS 2 Number of SVs JJ Number of usable GPS satellites 1 GPS date source K Source of GPS data See Source table on PV message 1 GPS data age L Age of GPS data See Age table on PV message 1 GPS tracking M 0 C hex GPS tracking status code See Tracking Status table on ST status message 2 GPIOS Mask NN hex Always returns FO 2 I Os state 00 hex Inputs less significant nibble and Outputs state 1 2 Reset Diagnos PP varies Destination configured for the Reset Diagnostic messages tic destination UU Reset Diagnostic messages are not active AO A9 Destination Address configured for the Reset Diag nostic messages 00 15 Destination Point configured for the Reset Diagnos tic messages 2 Current DP QQ 00 15 Destination Point that generated the Diagnostic Message query 3 Keep Alive time RRR 001 999 Keep Alive time used by the Current DP 000 indicates that
114. ORMAL mode Default character is 1B escape character 3 reserved Must be set to FF 1 Routing 0 F Destination Point index to send option the resulting TX messages One character corresponding to the hex value of the DP i e 00 15 0 F For more information and examples on the MDT PAD mode see the Serial Port Devices section of the Configuration chapter Also refer to the OR BCOMM Satellite Modems Support and the OBD Support sections of the Operation chapter for more information on these modes The TX message is also related to this mode DoT 193 Y 6 17 PV POSITION VELOCITY 6 17 PV Position velocity Qualifiers Q R This message gives the unit s current position velocity heading source of information and age of the data The message has the following format AAAAABBBCCCCCDDDDEEEEEFFFGGGHI Item Format Units Meaning GPS Time AAAAA seconds Time of the generated report of day Latitude BBB CCCCC degrees WGS 84 Latitude It does include the sign Positive for north Longitude DDDD EEEEE degrees WGS 84 Longitude It does in clude the sign Positive for east Speed FFF mph Vehicle velocity Heading GGG degrees Vehicle heading in degrees from North increasing eastwardly Source H flag Position fix mode 0 2D GPS 1 3D GPS 2 2D DGPS 3 3D DGPS 6 DR 8 Degraded DR 9 Unknown Age of flag Age of data used for the report d
115. PERIODIC REPORT The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678 lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt A complete Time And Distance criterion min 120 secs dist 2km max 3555 secs gt 5TD80120000000203555 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input sense Asri Input report event gt SEDOSNV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05 gt SXATMOSInput 3 has been activated lt Ipnition sense 2 9 Ignition ON event gt SED19NV4 FOO lt Ignition OFF event gt SED20NV4 FOO lt Speed viol warning Set an speed limit of 65mph gt 5G50710650 lt Start a 15 secs timer when speed limit is violated silent event gt SED40SVO S07 ACT SGCOOTCO0015 lt Stop the timer when the speed falls below the limit silent event 155 5 9 IMPROVING THE PERIODIC REPORT gt SED415V0 507 ACT SGCOOU lt Create the violation report gt SED1ONV4 COO lt Drive a LED on output 1 ON when the speed goes beyond the limit silent event gt SED428V0 507 ACT SSSXP11 lt Drive a LED on output 1 OFF when the speed falls off the limit silent event gt SED43SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP10 lt START STOP monitoring
116. RR eR ee 137 5 3 Adding SMS interaction 138 5 3 1 Query the unit with a SMS 138 5 3 2 Set an output withaSMS 138 5 4 Adding voice interaction 139 5 4 1 Make the unit accept a phone call 139 5 4 2 Have the unit initiate a voice call 139 5 5 Ignition detection o oo o e a 0084 140 5 5 1 Seript 5222 48 6 2b eee eee eee 140 5 6 Speed violation with warning report 141 12 G Contents 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 6 1 Setting the speed limit 142 5 6 2 Start acounter 0 142 5 6 3 Creating the violation report 142 5 6 4 Something is missing 142 5 6 5 Driving the LED 142 5 6 6 SOIP seco dot Ko eds gok ea Re 143 START STOP monitoring 144 5 7 1 Setting a low speed limit 145 5 7 2 Start acounter 0 145 5 7 3 Create the STOP report 145 5 7 4 Create the START report 146 5 7 5 Something s missing 146 DG Script b e 2 4 We kek ok edhe da bee 146 Safe engine turn off 0 22004 148 5 8 1 Create the speed limit 149 5 8 2 Creating a timer 149 5 8 3 Cutting the ignition 149 5 8 4 Stopping the counter 149 5 8 5 Restore the user signal 149 5 8 6 Script 2222548 2
117. S TIMERS DISTANCERS are not interested on monitoring the CO5 signal We can query the distance counter value at any time gt QGCO5V lt Ant the unit shall respond gt RGCO5V00997 lt Indicating that the traveled distance since the counter set is 99 7km 997 x 100m We can also consult the actual settings of a counter gt QGCO05 lt The unit responds with the actual distance counter settings gt RGCO5DC0000100100 lt 6 10 GF GPIOS FUNCTION I O 6 10 GF GPIOs function I O Qualifiers Q S R This message is deprecated and it should not be used If used only the value FO is accepted This message is used to configure the unit s GPIOs Input Output function Antares SB does not have GPIOs It has 4 inputs and 4 outputs Note instead The message has the following format AA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 GPIOs AA Hexadecimal The GPIOs input output mask I O Mask An output is defined by setting the bit that corresponds to the GPIO s index An input is defined by re setting this bit Only the following command works on Antares SB gt SGFFO lt Any other value will make the unit return error 86 gt SGFO00 lt gt RER86 SGFOO lt 182 y O 6 11 GS SPEED LIMIT 6 11 GS Speed Limit Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure the speed limits that can be used to trigger ev
118. T 03 FA 1B FF ROUTE 4 lt After responding the command the serial port is driven into PAD mode For now on binary data can be exchanged Let s see how data is transformed in order to be delivered to the remote destination and vice versa Supposing the external device sends the following data Note Non printable data is shown between symbols in hex value 02 Test message 03 The Antares SB after receiving the 03 byte will send to Destination 04 the following TX message gt RTX O02Test message 03 lt Now if the device sends 02 10 1F AB AB 3B 12 ABCD 08 09 FC 03 The unit will send the TX message gt RTX 02 10 1F AB AB 3B 12ABCD b t FC 03 lt Notice that for bytes 8 and 9 the special characters listed on the TX message were used The inverse process works in the same way When the remote host sends to Antares SB a TX message it can contain any byte like character by means of escape sequences b 7 122 ya 4 21 ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER MONITORING If the host would like to send the sequence 02 07 08 FC AA xyz F1 to the device attached on the serial port then it has to send the follow ing TX message to the Antares SB gt STX 02 a b FC AAxyz F1 lt This will make the Antares SB send the original sequence to the attached device There is also a Full Binary MDT mode which allows to use the full range of binary characters The Full Binary MDT
119. This can be done by using the Event Handling X which will send the message to the serial port or a destination address that contains the destination point P15 serial port When using a destination address that contains both an GPRS IP destination and the serial port Antares SB will send a SC Originated Default Message to the serial port and a regular EV TAIP message to the GPRS IP destination 3 19 1 Setting up Antares SB for ORBCOMM Satellite Modems Antares SB communicates with the satellite modem via its serial port at 9600bps 8n1 To do so Antares SB serial port must be configured to work on an special byte mode which disables the TAIP console The default state of Antares SB is to work the serial port on TAIP console mode not in byte mode Byte mode has to be enabled with a TAIP command so that Antares SB can communicate with the Orbcomm System satellite DCT 79 zz A 3 19 2 Operation 3 19 3 Example 3 19 ORBCOMM SATELLITE MODEMS SUPPORT modem To enable the byte mode for Orbcomm System satellite modem use the gt SMTR lt TAIP message When in byte mode the user can not configure or consult the unit locally The TAIP console is always available over the air To enable TAIP console over the serial port again an special escaping message has to be sent This message will disable byte mode and enable TAIP console The escape message to enable the TAIP console is EXIT_COMMDATA without the
120. URN OFF Speed limit for START STOP detection gt 5GS0310080 lt Start 2 minutes timer gt SED38SV0 S03 ACT SGCO01TCO00120 lt Stop the time gt SED39SVO S03 ACT SGCO1U lt Create the STOP report gt SED30NV4 C01 lt Create the START report gt SED31NV4 SO3C01 amp lt Safe engine turn off Set the speed limit for the time speed condition gt GS0110150 lt Start 16 seconds timer when the speed falls off the previously set value and as long as the user signal is set gt SED145V0 501 U00 amp ACT SGCO2TCO0016 lt Stop the timer when the speed condition is violated gt SED15SVO 501 ACT SGCO2U lt Ignition cut event Sets output 4 high and sends a report to DA 5 gt SED13NV5 CO2U00 amp ACT SSSXP41 lt Restore set low the user signal gt SED16SVO E13 ACT SSSU000 lt end Having the unit configured this way the mechanism for driving the ignition OFF safely is 1 To start the safe engine turn off process activate the user signal 00 For this send to the unit gt sSSU001 lt CY 152 y O 5 9 IMPROVING THE PERIODIC REPORT 2 If you receive a confirmation of this message the turn off process has initiated Wait for event 13 to report When event 13 report is received it means that the given time speed condition met and the vehicle s engine has been turned off 3 To restore the ignition on the vehicle simply deactivate
121. V Battery level defined as a voltage value P Battery level defined as a percent age value U Delete the battery level 5 Battery CCCCC A millivolts value or percentage value level See the Back up battery section on the Operation chapter for examples 227 zz 6 40 XAGF STORE amp FORWARD THRESHOLDS 6 40 XAGF Store amp Forward Thresholds Qualifiers Q S R The Store amp Forward Thresholds allow to create reports based on the number of stored events in the Store amp Forward Buffer of a particular Destination Point The message has the following format AABCCDDDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning Index AA 00 04 Store amp Forward threshold index Action B flag N Define the Store amp Forward threshold as a total number of stored messages P Define the Store amp Forward threshold as a percentage value U Delete the Store amp Forward threshold Destination Point CC 00 14 Indicates the Destination Point that will be monitored for messages stored in the Stored amp Forward buffer Value DDDD integer Value of the Store amp Forward thresh old 228 A O 6 41 XAGH Heading deltas Qualifiers Q S R 6 41 XAGH HEADING DELTAS This message is used to configure heading changes to be monitored with J signals The message has the following format AABCCC
122. X message to a Destination Point DP or Destination Address DA containing an specific counter s see GC mes sage value The message takes a counter s index and a DP or DA index The message has the following format AABB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Counter Index AA 00 19 Counter s index whose value is going to be reported on a TX message 2 Destination BB Destination for the TX message If the first character of the field is the let ter A it is understood by the unit that the second digit holds a Destination Address If both characters of the field are digits the unit assumes the user is specifying a Destination Point Destination Addresses range from 0 to 9 Destination Points range from 00 to 15 6 32 1 Reported Message After receiving the XACR command the unit will send a TX message to the selected DP DA with the selected counters value The message for a counter configured to count distance is as follows gt RTXDistancer 2 10 x 1000m lt This is going to be displayed on the AVL software as Distancer 2 10 x 1000m The first word holds the type of counter then the counters index is shown After the equal value the counters value followed by the delta factor configured for the counter Other types of counter messages are Timer 5 2 x 300s Distancer 2 70 x 1000m Counter 3 1200 x 10 If the counter s index is followed by S it means the counter is actuall
123. XADPO000avl server com 2145 lt The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678 lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80120000000203555 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input sense aaa Input report event gt SEDO5NV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05 gt SXATMO5Input 3 has been activated lt Ignition sense TIT Ignition ON event gt SED19NV4 FOO lt Ignition OFF event 158 5 10 RECONNECTION EVENT FOR TCP gt SED20NV4 F00 lt Speed viol warning Set an speed limit of 65mph gt 5G50710650 lt Start a 15 secs timer when speed limit is violated silent event gt SED4085V0 S07 ACT SGCOOTCO0015 lt fStop the timer when the speed falls below the limit silent event gt SED41SV0 S07 ACT SGCOOUK lt Create the violation report gt SED10NV4 C00 lt Drive a LED on output 1 ON when the speed goes beyond the limit silent event gt SED428V0 507 ACT SSSXP11 lt Drive a LED on output 1 OFF when the speed falls off the limit silent event gt SED43SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP10 lt START STOP monitoring Speed limit for START STOP det
124. XAEF Extended EV message Formats 223 XAFU Firmware Upgrade Over the air 225 XAGA ADC levels o 226 XAGB Back up Battery levels 227 XAGF Store amp Forward Thresholds 228 XAGH Heading deltas o 229 XAGM Garmin Mode 230 6 42 1 XAGMI Consult Garmin Device General Infor MATOM ocre ee aa 231 6 42 2 XAGMKI Garmin Mode Driver ID 231 6 42 3 XAGMKSA Garmin Mode Add Driver Status 232 6 42 4 XAGMKSD Garmin Mode Delete Driver Status 233 6 42 5 XAGMKS Garmin Mode Change Driver Status 233 DCT 15 lhl Contents 6 42 6 XAGMR Garmin Mode Add or Delete Canned Replies enas aoe be eh ad 234 6 42 7 XAGMRS Garmin Mode Canned Reply Text Message 1 ee ee g 234 6 42 8 XAGMS Garmin Mode Stop Message 235 6 42 9 XAGMCS Garmin Mode Change Stop Message SUAtUS e a ee ge A a oe Hee Faw 4 eS eee 237 6 42 10 XAGMTS Garmin Mode Text Send 238 6 42 11 XAGMT Garmin Mode Message Status 239 6 42 12 XAGMTA Garmin Mode Set Canned Message 240 6 42 13 XAGMTD Garmin Mode Delete Canned Message 240 6 42 14 XAGMX Delete Fleet Management Protocol Re lated Dates o d Y s ee ACES wR ek 241 6 43 XAGN Acceleration Limits 242 6 44 XAGP GPRS Pause 243 6 45 XAGR Circular Regions 244 6 46 XAID IMEIasID 000 000
125. XAOF FUEL LEVEL PERCENTAGE VALUES This message is used to configure the fuel level thresholds associated to the OF signals This fuel level thresholds are presented in a percentage value The message has the following format ABCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Index A 0 4 Threshold index 1 Action B flag 1 Sets the threshold U Deletes the threshold 5 Fuel level CCC 000 100 Fuel Level threshold In a percentage value For example to set Fuel Level percentage threshold 1 to 5 percent use gt SXADF11005 lt Now to generate an event when Fuel Level goes bellow 5 percent gt SED32NVO OF1 lt 258 Y 6 60 XAOG REMAINING FUEL GALLONS THRESHOLDS 6 60 XAOG Remaining Fuel Gallons thresholds Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure the fuel level thresholds associated to the OG signals This fuel level thresholds are presented in Gallons remaining The message has the following format ABCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Index A 0 4 Threshold index 1 Action B flag 1 Sets the threshold U Deletes the threshold 5 Fuel level CCC 000 500 Fuel Level threshold Gallons remaining For example to set Fuel Level threshold 1 to 10 gallons remaining use gt SXA0G11010 lt Now to generate an event when Fuel Level goes bellow 10 gallons remaining gt SED33NVO 0G1 lt 259 YN 6 6
126. XATM User defined Text Messages 276 6 75 XATS TAIP Console Sniffer 277 6 75 1 Example c poa magny rra aO a OR A a 277 6 76 XAUN UDP Network aoaaa aaa aa 278 6 77 XAUO UDP Origin Port aaaea ed 279 6 78 XAUP UDP Server Port lt 445 2644 6523 E 280 6 79 XAVC Voice Call Start 281 6 80 XAVE Voice Call End 282 6 81 XAVI Voice Call Identification switch 283 6 82 XAVM Microphone gain 284 6 83 XAVO Virtual Odometer 285 6 84 XAVS Speaker volume 286 6 85 Errors lst o eos gn nee sa sana ee ae Se ee pp a 287 7 Appendix A Quick Start Guide 291 8 Appendix B Getting Started Script 294 9 Appendix C Signals Table 295 17 G Contents 10 Appendix D Quick TAIP reference 299 10 1 Setting the Antares SE Das 299 10 2 Setting the APN o 299 10 3 Configuring the SIM card PIN 299 10 4 Restarting the unit o a 299 10 5 Restoring to factory defaults 299 10 6 Reseting the GPRS connection 300 10 7 Configuring a host address type 300 10 8 Configuring a telephone number for SMS and Voice o doce aod g GS Abe a whe eee Be Ae A 300 10 9 Querying hosts ports and telephones 300 10 10Grouping AVL servers on DAs 301 10 11Defining a periodic timer 301 10 11 1 Using a time counter
127. a selected DA or DP The message has the following for mat AA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 DA or DP Ac AA Command tion U Deactivate the resets diagnos tics A0 A9 Route diagnostic TX messages to the DA specified by number 00 15 Route diagnostic TX messages to the DP specified by number TD Route diagnostic TX messages to the current DP The DP used to send this message to Antares TM P SB is considered as the current DP 268 Y 6 67 6 67 XARE REGIONS REPORT XARE Regions Report Qualifiers Q R Use the Region ID report to define a single event for several circular and polygonal regions A report will be sent using only one event code when the associated regions signals transition This TAIP message will generate a report every time the unit enters a region and or the unit leaves a region The generated report will include In Out indicator the type of region and the region index The message has the following format ABBCDE Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action A flag Indicates how the event will be triggered I Will only be tiggered when the unit goes inside a defined Region O Will only be tiggered when the unit goes outside a defined Region B Will be triggered both when the unit goes into a Region or leaves the Region U Undefine the report 2 Event BB 00 49 Event code that will be used by the generated
128. ace Protocol messages 3 9 1 TAIP Message Format All TAIP messages use printable ASCII characters The unit can be configured to output TAIP messages in response to queries or on a scheduled basis Each message has the following format gt ABB C flag DDDD flag DDDD lt where Field Meaning gt Start of a new message A Message qualifier BB Message identifier C data string DDDD Optional report flags lt delimiting character x signifies that x can occur any number of times x signifies that x may optionally occur once Queries that result on multiple answer messages can only be used over the serial port DCT 61 M G Start of a New Message Message Qualifier Message Identifier Data String Optional Report Flags ID Flag ID 3 9 TAIP CONSOLE The gt character ASCII code 62 decimal is used to specify the start of a new message A one character message qualifier is used to describe the action to be taken on the message See the following table for the list of valid qualifiers Qualifier Action Q Query for a single sentence R Response to a query or a scheduled report S Configuration or set message Alphabetical characters used to identify messages For example PV for a position velocity message ED for an event definition or ER for an error message See the TAIP reference chapter for a
129. address is found on the list the server is validated an the TAIP command is accepted as long as the corresponding Destination Point has the TAIP console access enabled default state The Destination Points list can be set and consulted with the XADP command There are some considerations to be taken when the unit is working behind a NAT very common when the unit has Internet access If the Destination defined for TAIP console access is also the AVL server which listens for the unit s periodic and exceptional reports there has to be some reporting criteria that guarantees that the unit will not be silent for a period of time longer than the NAT s port expiration time If the unit is silent for a longer period the NAT server on the cellular carrier s side will silently close an active TCP connection or eliminate any UDP port translation making it impos sible for the AVL server to send queries to the unit until the unit reports again In a similar situation when the TAIP console access is granted to an IP host other than the AVL server which recollects the unit s reports a periodic time only criteria has to be defined to generate a report to the IP host so it can consult the unit at any time For TCP this time is around 1 hour and for UDP is around 5 minutes but this is dependent on the cellular operator and may be different in your case This situation has two possible workarounds DCT 59 G 3 8 2 Via SMS GSM
130. ally altered with the GC command Use command on a previously defined counter The next graph illustrates this Note that altering a counter s value does not affect its counting con figuration After altering its value the counter keeps on counting from the the V counter value gt SGCO0S lt 1 500 400 300 gt SGC00S lt 200 100 gt SGCOOR lt 0 100 200 300 400 500 time s gt SGCOOTCO0300 lt counter signal C00 true false time s given value 114 i O 4 12 USING COUNTERS counter value gt SGCOOVX00000 lt 500 400 300 200 100 gt SGCOOVX00340 lt 100 200 300 400 500 time s gt SGCO0TCO0300 lt counter signa C00 true false time s The X next to the V on the setting value command indicates the counter to preserve its recycling flag If the letters R or C were used instead of X the counter will not only change its value but its recycling configuration too A counter value may be consulted at any time Use the V command in query form gt QGCOOV lt A counter configuration may include an optional delta parameter to make the counter value increment only when the counting variable reaches the delta This is useful for counting not only seconds but minutes hours etc or for distance counter to count meters kilometers tens of kilometers etc COUNTERS type counters only count on a command basis mea
131. an OBD communication checksum error has oc curred See the XAOS message OS2 OBD Vehicle Ignition State True when the OBD detects that the vehicle ignition is on See the XAOS message OS3 Vehicle Malfunction Indicator Light True when the OBD detects that the Vehicle Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Check Engine Indicator is on See the XAOS message OS4 Secondary OBD tool connected True if there is a secondary OBD is tool connected See the XAOS message ROO R29 Regions True when the vehicle is inside the corresponding region See the GR message RST Software reset This signal is used do detect a firmware reset It is set to true every time there is a software reset and it is immediately reset after the first events evaluation S00 S09 Speed thresholds True when the vehicle s speed is faster than the correspond ing speed threshold See the GS message TOO T09 Time Windows True when the time and date are within the corresponding time window See the GT message TDO TD9 Time and Distance True when the associated Time and Distance counter has a Time and Distance condition true The signal is immedi ately reset after being evaluated to enable the counter for further triggers See the TD message U00 U09 User flags These signals may be changed by the user at any time with the SS message voo V05 Voice signals V00
132. an be used by systems that know the location of Cells to approximate a location of an unit with no GPS 1 1 18 Molex type connectors Inputs outputs ADC input voltage ignition sense and power are all provided on molex type male connectors which allow for molex type female receptacles This quality industry proved type of connectors is very suitable for vehicles environments 1 1 19 SMA Reverse polarity GPS antenna connector 1 1 20 Event Reporting The antennas can not be erroneously interchanged because of the reverse polarity condition of the GPS antenna connector Antares SB has the ability to interpret complex user defined report ing criteria to track normal as well as exceptional situations This is called Event Report and it is mainly done via the Event Machine included in the unit s firmware This allows to create scenarios that include the boolean combination of the following variables b 24 y 1 1 FEATURES e 30 Polygon defined geographical regions 50 points each 100 circular geographical regions 10 Speed limits e 5 Positive negative acceleration limits 10 Time windows dates intervals 4 Discrete inputs e 4 Discrete outputs e 20 Counters for traveled distance time and event counting e 5 Heading change deltas turn by turn report e 5 Analog to Digital Converter thresholds 5 Back up battery level thresholds 10 User signals to create complex reports e Fixed sig
133. and or state is desired to be remotely moni tored controlled The geographical position is taken from the unit s built in GPS re ceiver which gives information such as position velocity heading time date acceleration altitude The vehicle s state may be moni tored and or controlled by using the unit s discrete inputs outputs analog to digital converter audio support and its RS 232 serial port The last one useful to communicate with expanding accessories such as PDAs or MDTs A list with the unit s features is presented next A brief descriptions is given for detailed information see the given sections chapters 1 1 1 Analog to Digital Converter An input voltage ranging between 0 and 32V may be measured with the ADC For information on the ADC refer to the Analog to Digital Converter section on the Operation chapter 1 1 2 Discrete Inputs and Outputs The unit has 4 discrete inputs 4 discrete outputs and an ignition sensor Electrical information is found on the About and Operation chapters 1 Mobile Data Terminal 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 1 5 1 1 6 1 1 FEATURES Optional Back up Battery Voice support SMS support The Antares SB may include a built in back up battery to be used when the vehicle s battery is unavailable Refer to the Operation chapter for more information An audio jack for non balanced hands free audio systems allows the unit to initiate and receive phone calls Hands free
134. and the PC s serial ports You can also use an USB serial port converter Open TAIP Downloader and follow the next steps 3 22 2 STEP 1 Selecting a COM port 1 Choose a COM port EDET Antares Configuration T The Comm Port menu shows a list of serial ports detected by TAIP Downloader at startup Before selecting a serial port make sure that other applications like Hyperterminal are not using it If your serial port is not listed close TAIP Downloader check your serial port hardware and open TAIP Downloader again When the port is successfully opened a black dot is displayed next to its name 3 22 3 STEP 2 Test Communication Try to communicate with the unit by clicking Test Communication The unit s Version ID and IMEI fields should be filled This test may fail if e The selected COM port is not the port the unit is connected to e A virtual USB COM port may need to be reset Close the applica tion disconnect the USB Serial Converter wait a few seconds con nect again wait for Window s to detect the hardware and reopen TAIP Downloader If this fails try disconnecting the USB Serial converter and reinstalling its drivers e The unit is temporarily unavailable to attend the TAIP console Retry the test after 15 seconds e TAIP Downloader default configuration has been changed Check that Comm Port Settings are set like the next diagram 15 TAIP Downloader s list of
135. and to connect accessories like PDA like devices or MDTs The Antares SB s works as an RS 232 DCE device See the Serial Port section in the Operation chapter for more in formation bey 27 1 3 FRONT SIDE DESCRIPTION 1 3 2 SIM card slot Use this slot to insert the GSM SIM card Insert the SIM card as described on the next figure Use a thin object like a coin to get the SIM card fully inserted until it clicks b z D M Un gt Un A The SIM gets locked when it clicks A click is only possible with the correct orientation To remove the SIM card push it with a thin object until it clicks 1 3 3 LEDs Four leds are provided e ON LINE Green e FIX Yellow e SIGNAL Orange e POWER Red See the LEDs section on the Operation chapter for more information CY 28 y 6 1 3 FRONT SIDE DESCRIPTION 1 3 4 AUDIO jack The audio connector is designed to connect a non balanced hands free audio system See the Specifications section for information on the type of speaker and microphone that can be used The connector is designed to use a 2 5mm stereo plug with the fol lowing configuration A non balanced speaker microphone connection must be as follows MIC Mic COMMON GND Speaker Speaker i Most popular cellular phones hands free that use a 2 5mm stereo plug are compatible with this design 29 pg 1 4 BACK SIDE DESCRIPTION 1 4 Back side descr
136. aracters to the script 127 Y Warning 4 28 3 Writing Scripts Warning 4 28 USING SCRIPTS Make sure of using TAIP Downloader version 1 0 2 or superior Contact Digital Communications Technologies for information on how to upgrade Using TAIP Downloader go to the Device menu and select the Read con figuration option A file name and location will be asked After clicking the Save button the reading process starts This process takes approxi mately 1 minute and depends on the unit s configuration While the reading process is taking place you will see the dialog Sending Message with a cancel option If you get an error when reading see the TAIP error list on the TAIP specification chapter Now you can view edit the generated tmf file and check the unit s con figuration Make sure of following the instructions on the TAIP Downloader Tool section of the Operation chapter and have T ATP Downloader already con nected and communicating with Antares SB before proceeding Make sure of using version 1 0 2 or superior of TAIP Downloader Contact Digital Communications TM Technologies for information on how to upgrade On TAIP Downloader go to the Device menu and select the Write con figuration option The software will ask for a tmf file to use select the tmf file that holds the configuration script after clicking Open the writing pro cess starts Refer to the
137. ata 0 Not available 1 Old 10 seconds 2 Fresh lt 10 seconds 194 6 18 RF RADIO FREQUENCY MODULE CONFIGURATION 6 18 RF Radio Frequency module configuration Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure Cellular Network parameters Any RF parameter can be left empty by issuing the command Note without the B string The message has the following format A BBB Item Format Value Meaning Parameter A char Values ID I SIM Card PIN A GPRS APN Access Point Name 40 chars max L GPRS Login 40 chars max P GPRS Password 40 chars max Parameter B string String with the parameter described by A It can not contain the lt or the characters See the Configuration chapter for examples 195 6 19 RM REPORTING MODE 6 19 RM Reporting Mode Qualifiers Q S R This message controls flags used to change the format of the responses and reports i e messages with the R qualifier The message has the following format ID_FLAG A EC_FLAG B CR_FLAG C ER_FLAG D CS_FLAG E Chars Item Format Value Meaning ID Flag A flag Include the unit s ID on each mes sage with a ID postfix T True Default F False EC Flag B flag When set the unit will echo any correct message that uses the S qualifier T True Default F False CR
138. ation tags as described on the EV message section A BBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Message ID A A B or C The extended EV format being set or consulted varies Information varies Enter the following tags separated by a character Tags AC Vehicle acceleration AL Vehicle altitude AD Analog To Digital Converter BL Battery level CVxx Counter xx value IO Input Outputs NS GSM GPRS Nework state SV GPS Satellites in view CE Cell ID Information CF Cell ID Information Full OE Instantaneous Engine s RPM Vehicle Dependant OT Instantaneous Throttle 0 100 Vehicle Dependant OF Fuel Level Vehicle Dependant OG Remaining fuel gallons Vehicle De pendant OR Instantaneous Fuel Rate Vehicle De pendant OS OBD Status Comm State Check Sum error Ignition MIL Secondary Tool OD Vehicle s Odometer in miles Vehicle Dependant Ol Trip Odometer in 1 miles Vehicle Dependant VO Virtual Odometer value RE Region Event U Delete this format For example to set event 49 to send en extended EV message that includes the vehicle s acceleration the number of GPS satellites in view and the state of dis tance counter 05 whenever the vehicle s speed goes beyond 55 mph Define the event Set it to use extended EV format A gt SED49NA0 S00 lt Define extended EV format A to include the required tags gt SXAEFA AC SV CVO5 lt To d
139. attery whenever the switch is turned off See the warning about vehicles that use a main switch for cutting restoring the negative terminal of the vehicle s battery described on the Power supply section 2 1 POWER SUPPLY e If the switch disconnects the negative voltage of the vehicle s battery the Antares SB power CAN NOT BE TAKEN BE FORE THE SWITCH Doing so will make all of the unit s con nections to ground like panic buttons and its chassis serve as current path canceling the vehicle s main power switch thus making large currents circulate trough the unit For this config uration it is mandatory taking the unit s power after the switch making the unit work with its back up battery every time the main power switch is off When the vehicle uses a switch for the negative line that goes between the vehicle s battery and the vehicle s chassis DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT S GND TO THE BATTERY S NEGA TIVE This could seriously damage the unit Connect the unit s GND to the vehicle s chassis after the switch so the unit runs on its optional back up battery while the switch is off Warning See the next figures for a better understanding of connecting the unit when the vehicle uses a main power switch 40 es G 2 1 POWER SUPPLY To vehicle s electrical system Power switch ANTARES GPS To vehicle s chassis biie battery To vehicle s electrical system Power sw
140. ayers BUQIaDH A133409 Ul 3 10q PSB SOYOSIP D LIM JUN D UO Ns D dn 34D PINO GJI Jamog AY JO uogozpiqnysa UL din Jamod Ja ye spuores G ynoge sae SIY NewON NO pos RyS 0 037 Jmog 341 104 YEMA 13 yun ay 0 ssauJey Jamod ay 198410 sausey savod 241 0 anos Jamod e pay y Ajsnotaaud BuLeH P Yun ay wouy Puer WIS ay arowa papasu y gt and ulo gt ayy 0 pue pun ay 0 31922 Jenas Z Z Sy ay pauo q Hun ayy 0 euuazue SydD WS9 34 uuo e NO YIMOd ANY LOANNOD dL UO SHodau div Joy Butuagsy Jamas JAY UY O o Pauinbau NdY PUE Nid P429 WIS PaIqeus sudo O aenga aau uouadns JO y 9 UOISIDA 183 ZEZ SH ASN 10 ZEZ SY SUNOS avd 18 0 Id AZE N 8 S3 LISINMOIYIYd NOILVYNDIANOD Z Z JGIND LYVLS AJNO o o o 8 Appendix B Getting Started Script Select the following script and paste it on any plain text editor to create the GettingStarted tmf script file Antares SB script Getting Started example Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Unit s ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIM s PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPOOOOavl1 server com 2145 lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D si
141. back up battery level To query the voltage value and charge level of the internal back up battery send gt QXABS lt 10 20 Driving the unit to sleep power mode To activate the power saving mode send gt SXAPMA lt To make the unit go to sleep mode immediately without activating the power saving mode once the unit wakes up it won t go to sleep again automatically gt SXAPMI lt To deactivate the power saving mode send gt SXAPME lt 10 21 Querying the firmware version Send gt QVR lt 10 22 Activating PAD mode on serial port Send gt SMTP lt To get the serial port back to TAIP console mode after using the previous PAD mode command send 0x1B ESC key over the serial port 303 PQ G
142. be grouped to form a Destination Address or simply a DA As you can deduce from the list there are 16 DPs The unit offers 10 possible combinations of DPs leading to 10 DAs In the majority of cases DAs are used to tell the unit where to send its report but sometimes i e some commands need an specific destination a DP is required Destination Points DPs As mentioned there are 16 DPs these are divided in the following way e The first 10 DPs 00 to 09 are IP hosts These are defined with DCT 93 y Q 4 3 DESTINATIONS DPS AND DAS an IP address or a server name and a TCP or UDP port number The Antares SB is a TCP and or UDP client which always starts the communication This means that the IP host has to be a TCP or UDP server listening for incoming connections on the same port specified here e The next 5 DPs 10 to 14 make reference to phone numbers These numbers are used to send SMSs or make voice calls They are also used as authorization numbers for responding to received SMSs commands and or answering incoming voice calls Defining if a report should be sent on TAIP or using a custom user message is also done here e The last DP 15 makes reference to the serial port For more information see the XADP message 4 3 2 Destination Addresses DAs A Destination Address is a user defined group of Destination Points This enables some reporting commands to route their report to several destina ti
143. body initiates a connection In this case the units responds TAIP queries sent as UDP datagrams from a remote IP address name defined on an UDP IP type Destination There are two mechanisms for interrogating the unit via UDP datagrams Us ing the unit s UDP server port and or using the unit s UDP origin port The latter is by default dynamically generated and changed by the unit as datagrams are sent but using the TAIP command XAUO this value can be fixed e UDP Server Port Set a value from 1 to 65535 with the com mand XAUP so the unit always listens to UDP datagrams con taining TAIP commands on a fixed always available port No tice that the UDP server port solution only works when both the server sending the TAIP query and the Antares SB are located on the same network Virtual or Real This is not the case on the majority of situations where the unit has Internet access e UDP Origin Port The Antares SB always listens for TAIP queries sent over UDP datagrams to its UDP origin port The UDP origin port is created whenever the unit sends an UDP datagram to a remote peer so if the unit has never sent a datagram it will not create and hence listen on this port Also notice that the UDP origin port the unit creates is attached to the remote peer s address and port socket so an UDP origin port only listens to UDP datagrams coming from the peer to which the last report was sent In fact there is more than one UDP origin port t
144. built in back up Lithium Polimer battery to be used whenever the main power source the ve hicle s battery is lost or sabotaged Not all of the units come with the built in back up battery contact Digital Communications Technologies or your dealer and ask for information The duration of the back up power depends on many factors like e Frequency of the unit s reporting e Network conditions Poor network signal demands more power from the unit e Battery condition At full charge mid charge etc e Unit working on the sleep or normal mode Having the back up battery at full charge on good network conditions the measured durations are e 10 hours at full rate GPRS transmission Having the unit re porting to an IP type destination on a 10 seconds basis DCT 55 y Note Example Example Example 3 6 BACK UP BATTERY e 10 days when in sleep mode Only inputs detection is available and an optional wake up interval is available This last wake up option was not used on the battery test The battery level measurement is done in a similar way as the unit s Analog to Digital Converter please refer to that section for some notes The battery state is not an instant value of the battery level instead it gives an average value computed every 10 seconds The actual computed value may be consulted at any time with the XABS message see the TAIP reference for more information Qu
145. cally or remotely using the GSM GPRS network The unit s operation in cludes actions reports based on interaction with its surroundings like remotely given commands input sensing accessories messages etc The unit does not requires any starting command action to start working Once a valid configuration is loaded the unit is ready to work Follow the essential configuration parameters marked with an on the Configuration chapter in order to have the minimal oper ational parameters Many configuration scenarios are possible the most common one for the unit s operation is having it reporting a periodic status event to any IP server according to a Time And Distance or Time only cri teria and having the unit report other sort of events as an exception to this normal status event reporting Such an example is configuring the unit to report an input change to the same IP address and to a phone number via SMS whenever a driver presses a panic or assis tance button For information on how to configure the unit refer to the next section and to the Configuration chapter 1 Running an AVL server 2 A Time And Distance criteria is preferred over a Time only criteria 3 1 Serial Port 3 2 LEDs Note 3 1 SERIAL PORT The unit s RS 232 serial port can serve one of two non simultaneous purposes 1 Make a user or software interact with the unit s TAIP console for configuration and operational purpos
146. cation ch ea is 191 6 15 MS Memory Session oaoa a 192 6 16 MT MDT Mode onnan annaua 193 6 17 PV Position velocity 4 42 24 2464426684544 194 6 18 RF Radio Frequency module configuration 195 6 19 RM Reporting Mode 196 6 20 RP Registration Parameters Cellular Network 197 6 21 RT Reset message o 199 6 22 SS Signal Status 2 6 ee amp 6 66 rd e 200 6 22 1 Examples e 200 14 y Contents 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 ST cee e amp 2 2 286 e kk SAS oe ed Ee a i 202 TM Time and Date sc diri Sine oe 203 TD Time and Distance signals configuration 204 TX Text Message pa wt tree oe be ee ys Be 206 6 26 1 Escape sequences 02 000 206 6 26 2 Garmin Mode Messages 206 VR Version number 211 XAAC Analog to Digital converter 212 XAAU Challenge Text 213 XABS Battery Status 2 2 2644 42664545 214 XACE Cell Environment 215 XACR Counter Report 216 6 32 1 Reported Message 216 XACT Communication Test 217 XADM Diagnostic Message 218 XADP Destination Points 221 6 35 1 IP type destinations 221 6 35 2 Telephone destinations 221
147. ce that the UDP origin port of the datagram containing the response to a query sent to the unit throwout the UDP server port will not have as origin port the value set with the XAUO command but the value of the UDP server port XAUP The message has the following format AAAAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 Origin Port AAAAA 00000 UDP Origin Port A sets the originating port for 65535 UDP datagrams sent by the unit When the spe cial value of 00000 is used the unit does not use a fixed value but dynamically changes it according to internal mechanisms The default value is 00000 meaning that by default the unit will use a dynamic origin port 279 z 6 78 XAUP UDP SERVER PORT 6 78 XAUP UDP Server Port Qualifiers S Q R This command is used to configure a listening UDP port on the unit If the spe cial value 00000 is used the unit won t listen for UDP messages on a fixed port instead it will only use the dynamic port created when it sends reports to a UDP destination When set the unit listens for UDP messages on this port originated from any IP type Destination configured to work on UDP This validation can only be done when the Destination is defined as an IP number i e a host name can not be validated when trying to communicate trough the unit s UDP server port Another type of IP address validation can be done by configuring on the unit an UDP Network w
148. ce will return this sta tus for any Stop that is not present in the Stop list The value of Index will be set as and it should be ignored by the server 3 Index CCC 0 255 Position of the Stop in the Garmin s Stop List For example when the user reads a Stop Message in the Garmin device Antares will send to the server gt RTXGMSS000103000 lt And if the user sets this Stop Message as active Antares will send gt RTXGMSS000100000 lt But if the user deletes the Stop Message Antares will send this message instead gt RTXGMSS000104 lt TXGMTC Garmin Mode Canned Reply Unsolicited This message will be sent by Antares SB each time the user selects a Canned Reply that was generated by a Canned Reply Text Message This message has the following format 208 Y 6 26 TX TEXT MESSAGE Canned Reply was choosen AAAAAAAAAABBBBBCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Time AAAAAAAAAA Seconds Time when the reply was sent Is the num ber of seconds since 12 00 am December 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT off set must be calculated when using this TAIP message 5 Message BBBBB 0 99999 This is the ID of the Canned Reply Text Mes ID sage that is being replied to 3 Canned CCC 0 200 ID used to identify each Canned Reply Reply ID For example Antares SB will send the following
149. changed between the Antares B and the external RS 232 device there are two possible configurations 1 The external device talks TAIP so the main reason for connecting it with the unit is to receive GPS like information and display it locally An example is a laptop running an AVL application or a PDA running a GPS navigation software 2 The external device has no idea of TAIP so it talks any byte based protocol For the first option there are no special configurations on the Antares SB It is only necessary to configure the Event Machine to send reports to the serial port so the attached device has GPS events information to analyze For the second option the Antares SB is used just as a communication media between the attached device an a Destination When working in this mode the Antares SB can pass any byte like message to a Destination and vice versa This requires the Antares SB working on MDT PAD mode This is con trolled by the MT messages When working in this mode the TAIP console over the serial port is disabled In order for the serial port to enable the TAIP console again the user defined escape character has to be entered The default value for the escape character is 1B hex or the ESC key on a terminal If the serial port is not responding to TAIP commands it may be that the serial port is in MDT PAD mode In this case the escape char has to be entered The default escape char is 1B hex or the ESC key
150. com variable TCP UDP Port E E 0 65535 TCP or UDP port used by the IP server for listening to the unit s reports 6 35 2 Telephone destinations For Telephone destination i e format and table 221 z O Destination Points 10 to 14 use the following 6 35 XADP DESTINATION POINTS AABCD DDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Destination AA 10 14 Telephone destination point Point index 1 Type of host or B DP type Action Delete action U Delete the Destination Point O Report messages are sent as TAIP messages to this destination 1 User defined messages are sent in stead of TAIP See the XATM message Other values are reserved for future use 1 Access C Access for this Telephone 0 Full access 1 TAIP console via SMS restricted VOICE call reception allowed 4 TAIP console via SMS allowed VOICE call reception restricted 5 Full restriction variable Telephone D D 1 50 Telephone number chars For more information and examples refer to the Configuration chapter 222 y O 6 36 XAEF EXTENDED EV MESSAGE FORMATS 6 36 XAEF Extended EV message Formats Qualifiers Q S R This message allows the creation and configuration of up to three sets of infor mation tags to be used by an event having the Message ID qualifier set to A B or C This will make such an event generate an EV reporting message with extra inform
151. d be set to 11111 1 Power C flag Set to 1 to monitor the power detector input when in sleep mode Set to 0 to ignore this input on sleep mode 1 24v 12v D flag Ignored i e Always set to 0 1 Ignition E flag Set to 1 to monitor the ignition 1 IP4 F flag Set to 1 to monitor input 4 1 IP3 G flag Set to 1 to monitor input 3 1 IP2 H flag Set to 1 to monitor input 2 il IP1 l flag Set to 1 to monitor input 1 4 Wake up time JJJJ This is the Wake up time that tells the unit how long to stay awake after returning from sleep mode If the field value is entered as DDDD the default time of 2 minutes is used Wake up time is an integer value that can accept the scalar factors m or h on the least significant field to indicate minutes or hours if no scalar factor is included a value of seconds is assumed The minimum value is 1 minute the maximum is 999h 999 hours 4 Inactivity time KKKK This is the communication inactivity timeout in out seconds used when the unit is ready to go to sleep while it has detected over the air commu nication activity If the field value is entered as DDDD the default time of 1 minute is used This is an integer value that does not support scalar factors The minimum value is 60 seconds the maximum is 3600 seconds 4 Wake up inter LLLL This is the wake up interval used by the unit val to return from sleep to normal mode on a time basis If this field is not included the unit will
152. de The next two pages are a quick guide for installing and configuring the unit You can print these two pages and have them at hand yams 2 nueu Ss pun 34 0 1343Y Pasl4pe uous Ss JOU St 3 PJ5 S 3U3M 34 DULMOUA gt JNOY3WA jo autua sy e GUAL NOLLAWO GND At ho A SUOLJEPUaWODAI 10 YIHMS maag GND uonisod pug uny spun 3384103 zou Og dh UYIJIMS JAMOG uey Aug uo Su y asuss uou ay aa o 434m5 ued rues 2 NOLLAVO JALLIVOIN LV pom J1dWVWX3 NOLLDINNOD HD LIMS YIMOd NIVW HLIM SITIHIIA apis suequy apis ssuejyuy MOnSA amga pax 30 70 d1 a5ue10 Md dX E MO I tdi pau ama zax zmo onan vorus vairaa Tax 1100 pra monan suueAl bdi t andu L Sueo ranum ceda Y 10109 reais SAMP 3007 40707 umosg ayuya dij Landu y0133NN0 0 1 e vo veus wmo gt 3009 Y40107 SSINYVH J1AWWX3 LNdNI NOLLIINNO2 0 1 NOLLDINNOD YIMOd wwigol udaa 3 Cen She ameduwaa Sunesedo auan pnay Suelqua A YySiy e 0 payye JON il euuaju weajs s Jy JO 10je13811J34 CAB 533 13 391 SSN POD 3415533X3 Woy emy S3UJeH Jamog O yd s 3sneyxa ayy Jo O JOJOW SY 391 SSNS yay 3AIss33x3 WoW AEMy gs sauejuy O 1481 uns o aunsodxa 33541p ON 15 71 M93H9 USyeM YIM 12583103 ON uapu SNOISNIWIG SNOLLIONO IVLNIWNOYIANI NOILVTIVLSNI Z L AGIND LAVLS AAND SUIS qam 5 199 01 05 Suipeiidn uo s
153. de fines the counter in case the vehicle resumes its march before the 2 minutes condition to do so we use silent event 39 gt SED39SV0 S03 ACT SGCO1U lt This assures that a vehicle s stop that lasts less than 2 minutes is not going to be reported The corresponding script of this configuration plus all the examples worked so far is Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting SMS interaction Voice interaction Ignition sense Speed viol and warning START STOP monitoring Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Essential configurations Units ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIMs PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt 146 PQ 5 7 START STOP MONITORING The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678 lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt IMput sense s 8 2 gt 5 2 299229 5 Input report event gt SEDO5NV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05
154. dius GGGGGG meters Region radius min 50 meters 6 reserved HHHHHH reserved Reserved set to 000000 For example to create a circular region centered at N27 68694 E86 72917 with a radius of 500m send to the unit gt SXAGR331 276869 0867291000500000000 lt See the Using Circular Regions section on the Configuration chapter for more examples See also the XAIR command 244 z G 6 46 XAID IMEI AS ID 6 46 XAID IMEI as ID Qualifiers Q S R This message tells the unit whether to use or not defaults to not its IMEI as ID Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 action A 0 1 Use 1 to set the unit s ID with the IMEI Use 0 to set the unit s ID to the value set by the user with the ID message This is the default state 245 z G 6 47 XAIM IMEI consult 6 47 XAIM IMEI CONSULT Qualifiers Q R This message is used to consult the unit s IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity AAAAAAAAAAAAAAB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 14 IMEI A IMEI 1 IMEI s CS B IMEI s Check Sum 246 z G 6 48 XAIO Input Outputs consult 6 48 XAIO INPUT OUTPUTS CONSULT Qualifiers Q R This message is used to consult the actual state of inputs and outputs XABCD IEFHJ GKLM Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Out 4 A flag State
155. download process gets interrupted there will be no loss of the unit s functionality The unit will inform the end of the process to the Destinations selected with the XAFU command e After the file is downloaded the unit automatically installs and runs the new firmware e The download process may take 2 or 4 minutes under good network conditions e After downloading and installing the new firmware the unit will restart but no buffer data pending events will be lost e The unit s configuration is preserved throughout firmware upgrades Initiate an over the air firmware update with DCT s servers in order to up grade the unit s firmware to version 5 22 having the diagnostic messages sent over the serial port gt SXAFU00522S8V15 lt If no previous upgrade process is taken place the unit returns gt RXAFU005228V15 lt Indicating that the command was accepted and it has queued the process until GPRS is available if not available yet At a later time the unit will start showing diagnostic messages on the form of TX messages For example 14 There may be some exceptions to this Consult Digital Communications DCT 84 G TM A A Technologies for information 3 22 TAIP DOWNLOADER TOOL WRITE READ SCRIPTS gt RTXNew firmware installed Running version Antares GPS 5 22 lt Meaning that the upgrade process ended ok For detailed information see the XAFU message 3 21 2 Upgrading locally
156. ds to take care of any inconsistency due to an incomplete configuration pro cess that leads to a parameter depending on an un configured value Not all of the unit s parameters are required for it to start working The full spectrum of configuration messages is covered on the Unit s TAIP reference chapter Almost all of the unit s behavior is controlled by the configuration given on the event machine but there are some other parameters needed to get the Event Machine properly working These parameters enable the unit on the GSM GPRS network and define IP hosts and or phone numbers to be used by the Event Machine as destinations for its reports Destinations 1 A TAIP set message is characterized by the letter S on the message s qualifier Refer to the Operation chapter for more information 2 A TAIP response message is characterized by the letter R on the message s qualifier Refer to the Operation chapter 3 TAIP Downloader Tool Refer to the Operation chapter 4 1 UNIT S ID are also defined in order to gain remote access to the unit Note The sections on this chapter marked with an are essential to every configuration This chapter is a complement of the TAIP reference chapter and Note vice versa A lot of times will be expected for the reader to con tinue the given explanation on the TAIP reference when making reference to a TAIP message command 4 1 Unit s ID Essent
157. e See the SS and GF messages HOO H04 Store amp Forward Thresholds True when the ammount of messages stored in the S amp F Buffer exceeds the corresponding threshold value See the XAGF message IP1 IP4 Inputs True when the corresponding input is on See the SS mes sage JOO J04 Heading Deltas True when the vehicle s heading change is greater than the corresponding heading change threshold The signal is im mediately reset after evaluation to achieve a turn by turn report See the SXAGH message KOO K99 Circular Regions True when the vehicle is inside the corresponding Circular Region See the SXAGR and XAIR messages LOO L04 Virtual Odometer Thresholds True when the virtual odometer value exceeds the corre sponding threshold value See the XAVO message NOO N04 Acceleration For positive acceleration thresholds True when the vehicle s acceleration is larger than the corresponding threshold For negative acceleration thresholds True when the vehicle s acceleration is less than the corresponding threshold See the XAGN message DCY 104 8 c 4 5 EVENT MACHINE ID Signal Description OEO0 OE4 Engine s RPM thresholds True when the egine s RPM detected by the OBD is higher than the corresponding RPM thresholds See the XADE mes sage OTO OT4 Throttle Position thresholds True when the throttle position percentage is higher than the corresponding thr
158. e mask For example to set the UDP network as 172 29 1 x use gt SXAUN172 29 1 0 24 lt To set the UDP network as 192 168 x x use gt SXAUN192 168 0 0 16 lt To tell the unit not to use an UDP network validation gt SXAUNU lt On this last example the UDP Server port validation will still be done by the IP type UDP destinations single match mechanism See also the XAUP message 5 UDP Server port validation can only be done on IP type destinations defined as IP numbers but not with addresses defines with names 6 See the footnotes on the XAUP message 278 6 77 XAUO UDP ORIGIN PORT 6 77 XAUO UDP Origin Port By default Antares SB chooses the value of the UDP origin port when sending UDP datagrams Usually after a GPRS session has been established the cho sen port is 1024 This value is incremented and reused according to the unit s TCP IP stack There are some situations where it is desired no to have the unit chose this value With the XAUO command the user can set the origin UDP port to any value The accepted values range from 1 to 65535 and if the special value of 0 is used default value the unit is instructed to freely chose the origin port Notice that fixing the UDP origin port has nothing to do with the UDP Server Port XAUP The fixed UDP origin port will not listen for queries until the unit generates an UDP datagram Meanwhile the UDP Server Port is always listening Also noti
159. e access Error 8 is returned on every message 0 The IP type host has TAIP console ac cess U Undefined Delete the Destination Point 1 TCP UDP C flag TCP UDP and UDP ack UDP no ack selec selection tion Oor 1 This DP works on TCP 2 UDP without confirmation 3 UDP with confirmation 12 IP address DDD EEE FFF GGG decimal Decimal dotted format with the receiver s nu meric IP address 5 UDP TCP HHHHH decimal Decimal number between 0 and 65535 with the Port receiver s listening UDP or TCP port Note When using this message to query an IP type destination defined with the XADP as a host name the IP address 0 0 0 0 is returned The message has the following format for destination points 10 to 14 DoT 168 Y 6 4 DP DESTINATION POINT AABC DDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Destination AA 10 14 Decimal number holding the point s index In Point ID dexes 00 to 09 refer to IP addresses where an AVL software is listening for TAIP messages Indexes 10 to 14 refer to SMS receptors tele phones 1 Type of host B DP type Action or Delete ac tion U Delete the Destination Point 0 Report messages are sent as TAIP messages to this destination 1 User defined messages are sent in stead of TAIP See the XATM mes sage Other values are reserved for fu ture use 1 Access C Access for this Telephone O Full access 1 TAIP console via SMS restric
160. e Garmin device general information use the I modifier If this message is used while the Garmin mode is disabled the message will return all the parameters as 0 This modified TAIP message uses the following format AAAAAAAAAABBBBBCCCCCDEF Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Garmin AAAAAAAAAA Varies This is the Garmin device s ESN Elec ESN tronic Serial Number which is unique for each device 5 Product ID BBBBB Varies This is an unique number given to each type of Garmin device Model type 5 Garmin CCCCC Varies Is the software version number multiplied Software by 100 e g version 3 11 will be indicated version by 00311 1 A602 D flag Indicates if the Application Protocol A602 is supported 0 Not supported 1 Supported 1 A603 E flag Indicates if the Application Protocol A603 is supported 0 Not supported 1 Supported 1 A604 F flag Indicates if the Application Protocol A604 is supported 0 Not supported 1 Supported For example to consult the information of the Garmin device send gt QXAGMI lt Antares will respond with gt RXAGMI3547600041008270046111 lt XAGMKI Garmin Mode Driver ID Qualifiers Q S R To set or query the current Driver ID on the Garmin device use the KI modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 This message uses the following format DCT 231 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE AAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBB
161. e Garmin mode on Antares sB To delete all information related to the Fleet Management Protocol on the Garmin device disable its graphic interface and disable the Garmin Mode in Antares use the following message gt SXAGMX7 lt TM Antares SB will respond with the following message gt RXAGMX7 ID Test lt The Garmin device will then restart and the Fleet Management icon will no be shown To enable the Fleet Management features on the Garmin device again send the Garmin Mode enable message to Antares SB For example gt SXAGMEO lt DCT 241 zz G 6 43 XAGN Acceleration Limits Qualifiers Q S R 6 43 XAGN ACCELERATION LIMITS This message is used to configure positive and negative acceleration limits thresh olds Acceleration thresholds are monitored with the N signals Note that for positive acceleration thresholds Acceleration Sig nals are TRUE when the vehicle s acceleration is larger than the Warning threshold For negative acceleration thresholds Acceleration Sig nals are TRUE when the vehicle s acceleration is less than the threshold See the XAGN message for detailed information The message has the following format AABCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 limit ID AA 00 04 Identification code assigned to the threshold 1 Active flag B flag 1 Limit is active U Delete limit 3 Speed limit CCC 99 to 99 Acceleration li
162. e chose speed limit 03 for no particular reason other than being free to be used In a similar way as it was done on the Speed Violation example we now create a silent event that starts a 2 minutes timer counter whenever the vehicle s speed falls off opossite to the speed violation exp 8mph gt SED38SV0 S03 ACT SGCO1TCO0120 lt Note that we use counter 01 which is not being used by any other event and event 38 that it is also free Now any time the speed signal S03 gets false timer counter 01 will start 5 7 3 Create the STOP report This event should trigger when the 2 minutes timer reaches its threshold value That is it when C01 becomes true so we define the STOP event as gt SED30NV4 CO1 lt Notice that the event uses DA 4 and it is not silent so the event is re ported to the AVL server b 7 145 Y 5 7 START STOP MONITORING 5 7 4 Create the START report We define this event as occurring any time the vehicle s speed goes beyond the set limit of 8mph and a previous STOP condition existed To do so we create the START event as depending on the S03 signal AND on the counter 01 signal C01 This works because once the C01 counter reaches the 2 minute threshold the CO1 signal stays high forever until the counter gets undefined by something else gt SED31NV4 S03C01 amp lt 5 7 5 Something s missing 5 7 6 Script As with the Speed Violation example we also need a silent event that un
163. e following exceptions SXALL QRP SXARD QXANS QXAIM QXARD QXALL QVR QID QXAID QXADM The message has the following format A BBBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Operation A Operation L Lock The console will be locked with the code defined on B U Unlock The console will be unlocked The un locking code must be provided on B 4 code BBBB alpha Locking unlocking code The locking code can not numeric be 0000 For example to lock configuration messages for the serial port gt SXALLL12XY lt Now all configuration messages entered over the serial port will return error 30 gt SGS0310020 lt gt RER30 SGS0310020 lt To unlock the TAIP console again use U and the same code provided on the locking process gt SXALLU12XY lt 253 Y 6 55 6 55 XAMD MD5 CHECK XAMD MD5 Check Qualifiers Q R Use this message to check the MD5 checksum value of any string This message is used mostly as a diagnostics message that helps confirm the MD5 checksum values calculated by Antares SB and or the server performing the authentication This message has the following format AAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 4 80 Text AAA varies Text to be encoded using the MD5 mechanism MD5 result 32 charac ters long 254 A O 6 56 XANB Network Band mode Qualifiers
164. e if the situation persists 3 2 4 On line Green As long as the Power LED is solid ON this LED gives information on the GPRS session state e OFF The unit is Not Registered on the GPRS network e ON The GPRS session is up and ready When using TCP it also indicates that all of the TCP connections with all of the IP type Destinations are ready e Blinking The GPRS session is up and ready but at least one of the TCP sockets associated with IP type destinations is not open When using UDP the LED is either ON or OFF When an APN is set the unit will always try to start and maintain Note a GPRS session so the normal state of the On line LED when an APN is set is either ON or Blinking DCT 51 G 3 3 Inputs Ignition Example 3 3 INPUTS IGNITION The unit has 4 general purpose discrete inputs located on the main molex connector and a vehicle ignition detector located on the main power molex connector For the general purpose inputs the electrical conditions are as fol lows Logical State Electrical State Active OV to 1V Inactive 2 9V to 32V or Open For the ignition input State Voltage range Ignition ON 5 8V to 32V Ignition OFF OV to 4 8V or Open The Inputs state can be consulted locally or remotely at any time with the TAIP console Inputs are used to create events triggers on the Event Machine thus generating reports depending on
165. e unit reaches sleep mode a low power consumption state is reached on which only an input or a previously user defined timer expiration can make the unit go back to normal mode On sleep state an input change detection or the wake up timer count are the only functionality available This command includes as optional field an input mask to indicate which in puts to monitor when in sleep mode If no input mask is specified all inputs are monitored meaning any input change may awake the unit A wake up time optional field is included to indicate the unit how long to stay in normal mode after awakening before going to sleep again If not specified or if the special string DDDD is entered the default value of 2 minutes is used The communication time out used when the unit is ready to go to sleep while it has detected over the air communication activity is also an optional field that defaults to 1 minute The last optional field is the wake up interval which is used to awake the unit on a time basis If this field is not included the unit will not wake up on a time basis The message has the following format 264 8 G 6 64 XAPM POWER MANAGEMENT A BBBBBCDEFGHI JJJJ KKKK LLLL Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action A Action A Activate the power saving mode E End any active power saving mode I Go to power saving mode immedi ately 5 Flags BBBBB Reserved flags Shoul
166. e use the O qualifier for the Message ID field gt SED49X00 U00 CO1 amp lt And one that will send a regular EV TAIP message to the IP destination when it is reachable gt SEDOONVO UOOCO1 amp lt Antares SB must be working on Byte Mode so it can communicate with the satellite modem gt SMTR lt Through the OBDII Interface model BG accessory Antares SB can use the vehicle s On Board Diagnostic OBD system parameters to generate reports based on the vehicle s Engine RPM Throttle Position Speed Ac celeration Odometer Fuel Level Fuel Rate Ignition State and Malfunction Indicator Light Not all parameters are supported by all vehicles and not all vehicles are supported This depends on the brand model of the vehicle and also on the OBDII Interface model For more information about the OBD support please refer to aplication note AN0014E OBD Interface BG for Antares SB which can be downloaded here DCT 82 G 3 21 FIRMWARE UPGRADE Also refer to the XAOS XADE XAOG XAOF XAOR XAOT TAIP messages which are used to configure the Antares SB signals associated with the OBD parameters and the MT TAIP message which enables the communication between Antares SB and the OBDII Interface model BG accessory 3 21 Firmware Upgrade The Antares SB firmware may be changed locally over the serial port or remotely with the unit s built in Over The Air Firmware Upgrade support
167. ec Cold Start TTFF 39 4 sec Out of the box 41 sec Units with firmware version 3 02 e Supports SBAS WAAS EGNOS e Sensitivity 160 dBm Tracking 142 dBm Acquisition Standard Sensitivity Mode 148 dBm Acquisition Hot Start with ephemeris otherwise 146 dBm High Sensitivity Mode Protocol TAIP ASCII e Frequency L1 type 1575 42 MHz C A code e Channels 12 channel simultaneous operation e Update rate 1Hz e Accuracy Horizontal lt 2 5 meters 50 lt 5 meters 90 SBAS lt 2 meters 50 lt 4 meters 90 Altitude lt 5 meters 50 lt 8 meters 90 SBAS lt 3 meters 50 lt 5 meters 90 Velocity 0 06 m sec PPS 100 nanoseconds RMS e Acquisition Reacquisition 2 sec Hot Start 3 sec Hot Start w o battery back up 8 sec Ephemeris is not older than 4h Warm Start 35 sec Cold Start TTFF 38 sec Out of the box 41 sec To consult or update the firmware version of your Antares SB GPS ah r f TM module please contact Digital Communications Technologies Up dates are provided at no cost 1 5 10 GSM antenna connector SMA Sub Miniature A connector with a female center contact Use this connector for the GSM Antenna provided with the unit DCT 37 a 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS e 50 ohms impedance 1 5 11 GPS antenna connector SMA Sub Miniature A connector with a male center contact e 50 ohms impedance 6 Also called reverse po
168. ection gt 5GS0310080 lt Start 2 minutes timer gt SED38SVO S03 ACT SGCO01TCO00120 lt Stop the time gt SED39SVO SO3 ACT SGCO1U lt Create the STOP report gt SED30NV4 C01 lt Create the START report gt SED31NV4 S03C01 amp lt Safe engine turn off Set the speed limit for the time speed 159 5 11 MAIN POWER LOSS ALARM condition gt SGS0110150 lt Start 16 seconds timer when the speed falls off the previously set value and as long as the user signal is set gt SED145V0 S01 U00 amp ACT SGCO2TCO0016 lt Stop the timer when the speed condition is violated gt SED15SVO 501 ACT SGCO2U lt Ignition cut event Sets output 4 high and sends a report to DA 5 gt SED13NV5 CO2U00 amp ACT SSSXP41 lt Restore set low the user signal gt SED16SVO E13 ACT SSSU000 lt Reconnection event for DP 0Q gt SED49NV4 A00 lt end 5 11 Main power loss alarm 5 11 1 Script If the units has a built in back up battery it can send a report whenever the main power source gets disconnected To do so we use the F13 signal gt SEDO7NV5 F13 lt We choose event 07 for no particular reason Continuing with our example this will make event 07 to be reported to the AVL server and the Phone Number 912345678 any time the main power source gets disconnected Adding this message to the script is trivial so it is a task left to the read
169. ed on an AVL server an ID has to be set The default value for the unit s ID is 0000 This field may be any string of 10 characters maximum For this example lets call our unit EXAMPLE gt SIDEXAMPLE lt 5 1 2 Setting the APN and PIN Note After configuring an ID the first step is enabling the unit on the GSM GPRS network For this an APN provided by the cellular carrier is required and de pending on the SIM card configuration a PIN value will be required too For this example we will use APN internet carrier name com and PIN 1234 Setting the SIM card s PIN gt SRFI1234 lt If your SIM card does not requires a PIN you can omit this step Setting the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt At this point the until will try to register on GSM and on GPRS Although PIN and APN parameters take effect immediately the unit may take up some time on registering to the network if a previous erroneous PIN was used You can wait for the unit to register or you can speed up the process by resetting it with the gt SRT lt command 5 1 GETTING STARTED The GSM registration status is indicated by the status LED This LED is solid whenever the unit is not registered on GSM Although the unit is not registered it could be searching for the operator which is a normal con dition Other un registered conditions may be detected by means of the RP message When the unit is registered on GSM the status LED should be ei
170. een your server and your unit due to inactivity The keep alive packet contains the unit s ID without any TAIP message so your server has to expect these special non TATP messages This option can be used both on TCP and UDP IP type destinations After the Keep Alive is configured the unit must be reseted using the gt SRT lt mes sage or else the Keep Alive will not work The message has the following format ABBB C Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Destination A 0 9 The IP type Destination Point index for which the Point keep alive is being configured 3 Inactivity time BBB 001 999 Inactivity time in minutes Use 000 to deactivate the minutes keep alive mechanism All DPs but DP 9 default to or 000 000 DP 9 defaults to 60 minutes 1 CR LF C flag 1 Include Carriage Return and Line Feed after each Keep Alive packet 0 Do not include Carriage Return and Line Feed 251 y G 6 53 XAKL GPS BACK LOG 6 53 XAKL GPS Back Log Qualifiers Q R This message is used to retrieve up to the last 60 messages received from the unit s built in GPS module The message has the following format AAAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 4 Number of mes AAAA 0005 On a query Optional number of messages to re sages Message 0060 trieve If not set 60 meesages will be sent Index On a response The message index of the actual query For example t
171. elete the extended EV reporting format send gt SXAEFAU lt DoT 223 A O 6 36 XAEF EXTENDED EV MESSAGE FORMATS See the Reports messages section on the Operation chapter the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter and the ED and EV TAIP messages for more information See also the Scenarios and examples chapter 224 O 6 37 XAFU FIRMWARE UPGRADE OVER THE AIR 6 37 XAFU Firmware Upgrade Over the air Qualifiers S R This message starts an over the air firmware update process This message returns TAIP error 69 or 90 when used on a unit with this feature disabled The message has the following format ABBBBCCDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Server A 0 1 Firmware server Use 0 for DCT s servers 1 for user defined server 4 Firmware Ver BBBB Firmware Version to download The first two char sion acters must always be 05 which indicate firmware family The last two indicate the firmware version For example to update to FW 5 22 BBBB should be set to 0522 2 Firmware type CC Type of version to download Always set this value to SV 2 Diagnostics DD Indicates where to send the diagnostic reports of the route download installation process Use a number be tween 00 and 15 to indicate a Destination Point Use the letter A plus a number between 0 and 9 to use a Destination Address Contact Digital Communications Technologies fo
172. enerate an alarm report whenever the primary power is discon nected The optional unit s internal back up battery enables the unit to keep on working even when the vehicle s battery is disconnected This prevents thieves to easily disable power to the unit Generate a report when a vehicle goes out of a predefined polygonal region Sense and report the back up battery level status Use different reporting criteria according to the time of the day Generate a reconnection message to a TCP server whenever the socket gets reconnected Generate a distance report whenever the vehicle s traveled distance reaches a predefined threshold The virtual gps based odometer is not 100 precise Use the communication channels available to the unit on a cost ef fective way as they start failing You can enable the unit to always send its report via GPRS and only use SMSs when GPRS goes down finally if all GSM goes down too you can attach another type of last option communication media like a satellital modem to the unit s se rial port and tell the unit only to use it when both GPRS and GSM are down This gives a full communication coverage at a cost effective schema Sense the vehicle s ignition and speed to create IDLE STOP and MOVING events Reduce a report frequency when the unit starts roaming on GSM Sense the primary power presence and go to low power consumption mode or on the contrary increase the reporting criteria to report it
173. ents The message has the following format AABCCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Speed AA 00 09 Identification code assigned to limit ID speed limit 1 Active B flag flag 1 Speed limit is active U Delete speed limit 4 Speed CCCC 0 9999 Speed limit in miles per hour limit times 10 See the Setting Speed limits section on the Configuration chapter for exam ples 183 Y 6 12 GT TIME WINDOW 6 12 GT Time Window Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure the Time Windows that can be used to trigger events The signal associated with a Time Window becomes active when the actual date and time is between the values set by the TMin and TMax parameters Note The minimum time between TMin and TMax is 2 minutes The message has the following format AAB CCCCCCDDDDDDEEEEEEFFFFFF Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Time window AA 00 09 Identification code assigned to ID time window 1 Active flag B flag 1 Time window is active U Delete Time window 6 TMin Day CC CC CC yy mm dd Date at beginning of time window 6 TMin Time DD DD DD hh mm ss Time at beginning of time window 6 TMax Day EE EE EE yy mm dd Date at end of time window 6 TMax Time FF FF FF hh mm ss Time at end of time window If a day is not specified TMin Day and TMax Day are both 000000 TMin Time and TMax Time specify a pe
174. eported To define a silent action use the XCT string For example the following configuration gt SEDO1NVO FOO XCT SGCO1TROO300 lt will make the unit set a 5 minute counter everytime the vehicle is turned on but there will be no response for this action Only the vehicle ignition state will be reported For more examples see the Scenarios and examples chapter Finally triggers and actions are bound together on a single configuration message called event An event is defined or consulted with the TAIP ED message A single event holds a trigger a report action and optionally an user action The next figure gives a global description of the TAIP ED mes sage For detailed information refer to the unit s TAIP specification chapter User defined TAIP action gt RED24NVO SO3R1765S05 ACT SSSU061 ACT SSSU020 lt Event ID User defined Trigger TAIP action The Antares SB has 50 events available for the user to configure They may be defined all at once in a configuration script or they me be individually defined at any moment as the user adds removes functionality The actual events definitions of the unit may be consulted with the TAIP message gt QED lt This will have the unit deliver the configuration state of all 50 events An example of the returned configuration on the TAIP console is gt QED lt gt REDOONVO AOOTDO amp FOO amp lt gt REDOINV1 AO0 FO3 amp TD1 amp FOOk lt gt REDO2XMO FO3
175. er 5 12 Using the sleep mode Refer to the XAPM TAIP message 5 Built in back up battery is optional CT 160 Y 5 13 CONFIGURING READING A DISTANCE COUNTER 5 13 Configuring reading a distance counter Refer to the XACR message 5 14 Generating an extended EV report Related commands ED EV XAEF As mentioned on the Reports messages section of the Operation chapter an EV report can be extended to include extra information tags To do so the Message IDs A B and C of an event definition are used See the ED message An event defined with one of these letters as Message ID will be transmitted as an EV message with added information after the Source and Age fields The extra information is presented as strings separated by the character For a detailed information on these strings refer to the EV message We are going to configure 5 events to show how the extended EV report and the normal reports ET and EV work Let us set events 20 and 21 to send ET and EV normal not extended reports whenever the Counter 5 reaches some value defined elsewhere gt SED20NT2 C05 lt gt SED21NV2 C05 lt This will make the unit send the following reporting messages to Desti nation Address 2 whenever signal CO5 goes from low to high gt RET201447152212 ID EXAMPLE lt gt REV211447147509 2578250 0802813901519512 ID EXAMPLE lt Now let us set events 30 31 and 32 to send extended EV reports Events 30 and 31 wi
176. er defined polygons 50 points maximum each These polygon defined regions are defined with the GR message and the associated regions signals are the Rxx signals DCT 107 4 7 USING CIRCULAR REGIONS GEO FENCES Note For circular regions see the next section and the XAGR message For instructions on creating a region refer to the GR TAIP message Polygonal regions are useful for creating large regions like cities bound aries A large region can be used to e Restrict a vehicle s operation to an specific region by generating an exception report when traveling outside the boundary e Restrict a vehicle s operation to an specific region by SAFELY shut ting the engine OFF when leaving an special area The vehicle s oper ation can be restores later by a time condition or a remote activation e Use different tracking criteria according to city rural areas For ex ample A turn by turn is useful on the city whether a Time Distance condition may suit better on rural areas e Use different speed limit violation reporting according to special ar eas states For check points route following and geo fences Circular Regions may lead to better results See the next section 4 7 Using Circular Regions geo fences 100 Circular Regions defined each by a Latitude Longitude center and a radius in meters can be set As polygonal regions are useful for creating different criteria depending on differe
177. ery the actual battery status gt QXABS lt For a back up battery at 3 98 volts 72 of charge gt RXABS13980P072 lt The first 1 is indicating that the main power source is ON To change a reporting schedule and or report when the main power source is lost or damaged the F13 signal is used See the Event Ma chine section on the Configuration chapter for more information Send event code 44 whenever the main power source gets discon nected gt SED44XV0 F13 lt Sending reports whenever the battery level reaches some value or whenever it falls from another value is possible by using the Event Machine with the B signals which are configured with the XAGB mes sage Have the unit send event code 19 whenever the battery level gets higher than 90 and code 20 whenever the voltage falls below 40 Create the 2 battery level thresholds gt SXAGBO3P00090 lt T Up to 5 battery level thresholds may be defined with the XAGB message DCT 56 y G 3 7 Sleep Mode 3 8 Over The Air Note 3 7 SLEEP MODE gt SXAGBO4P00040 lt Create the events associated with signals B03 and B04 gt SED19XVO BO3 lt gt SED20XV0O B04 lt These events send the report to the serial port See the Event Ma chine section on the Configuration chapter for more information Refer to the XAPM TAIP message for more information on sleep mode Interacting with the unit remotely Over the Air is not different than
178. es In this mode only printable ASCII characters are used to communicate with the unit 2 Have the unit exchange any binary messages with accessories like MDTs or PDA like devices that can communicate over RS 232 In this mode any binary data except an user defined escape value may be used The unit s default setting is to work as described on the first option That is it the serial port is ready to exchange TAIP messages with the unit s TAIP console unless the user switches to the second mode In the second mode the unit will not listen to TAIP commands and the procedure to set it back to the TAIP console is receiving a pre configured escape character or a string sent as a single package The MT TAIP messages controls the serial s port mode see the TAIP ref erence and the Configuration chapter for more information The serial port works at 9600bps with 8 data bits no parity and one stop bit 9600 8N1 It does not use any flow control method and all of the RS 232 communication lines on the DB9 connector are used The Antares SB works as a DCE device meaning that it is connected to a PC with a one one cable The serial port works with pure RS 232 hardware as well as with USB to RS 232 converters When using the unit s serial port for the first time the gt QVR lt TAIP command can be used to test the communication path The unit should respond with its firmware version on a message like this gt RVR Antares GPS 05 30 1
179. es the neighbor s index and the second must be 99 e When two points lie on the same longitude it is not relevant which is the point with lower index but an special consideration must be taken When two connected points lie on the same longitude only one of them whichever is selected is left neighbor of the other e In case that a region has to cross the longitudes E179 99999 or W179 99999 or the latitudes N89 99999 or S89 99999 the region must be divided in such a way that it never crosses those boundaries 6 13 2 Regions creation examples Take a look to the following regions examples that follow the directions discussed above Example Region A This is a region where there are not special cases The region has 7 points 2 A maximum of 50 points may be defined for a single region 186 G 6 13 GR REGIONS This region is drawn with the north pointing upwards so you can see how the leftmost point has the index 00 and the rightmost has the higher index 06 following the longitude ordering discussed above Left neighbors Lets examine each point s left neighbors according to the definition given e Point 00 has no points on the left so it has no left neighbors These parameters should be filled with 99 each Left Neighbor 1 99 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 01 has point 00 to its left and is connected to it so this is a left neighbor There are no more points to the left of 01 so the
180. ete a Canned Reply to the Garmin device use the R modifier This list can not be consulted on the Garmin device The server must know the IDs that have been set in order to use them Antares SB will repond with Error 94 ifan Id that has not been set is used This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 The message has the following format ABBBCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action A Flag A Add a new Canned Reply D Delete a Canned Reply 3 Canned BBB 0 200 ID used to identify each Canned Reply Reply ID 1 40 Canned CCC Varies Canned Reply that will be displayed on the Reply Garmin device 6 42 7 XAGMRS Garmin Qualifiers S R For example to add a Canned Reply to the Garmin device use the following message gt SXAGMRAOOOPackage Delivered lt Antares SB will reponse like this to confirm that the Canned Reply was added gt RXAGMRAOQOOPackage Delivered ID Test lt To delete a Canned Reply from the Garmin device use the following message gt SXAGMRDOO3 lt Antares SB will reponse like this to confirm that the Canned Reply was deleted gt RXAGMRDOO3 ID Test lt Mode Canned Reply Text Message To send a text message to the Garmin device to which the driver is only able to reply to using a Canned Reply use the RS modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 The message
181. event message EV message ET message Orbcomm s SC Originated Default Message Binary form of the EV message extended EV message A extended EV message B extended EV message C extended EV message A for Orbcomm extended EV message B for Orbcomm c extended EV message C for Orbcomm TX AD gt XO4 lt K 1 Destination D 0 9 Destination address of the Event Message The Address value of this field is the index of the desired Des tination Address DA defined with the DA mes sage varies Signal EEE Any signal defined Signal s used to trigger the event on the Signals ta ble 1 Logical F flag Logical operation used to combine signals Operator amp AND OR 1 NOT 1 Event Sense G flag Edge of signals combination used to trigger the event Rising edge Falling edge varies Event Action HH message A valid TAIP message without the opening gt and closing lt delimiters Several TAIP ac tions can be defined on a single event There are two valid messages to define the action ACT which will make the event to be sent both through the serial port and over the air and XCT that will only send the event through the serial port See the following examples CT 171 PQ 6 5 1 Examples Single signal triggers Example Periodic report Example Panic button Example Several actions per event Example Several actions per event onl
182. for more information on this 6 42 5 XAGMKS Garmin Mode Change Driver Status Qualifiers Q S R To change the Driver Status for the current Driver ID on the Garmin device use the KS modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 Use the Q qualifier to query the current Driver Status This message uses the following format AAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Change ID AAAAAAAAAA 1 4294967295 This counter increases everytime the Driver ID changes The starting value is 1 10 Time of BBBBBBBBBB Seconds Time when the change was made Is the change number of seconds since 12 00 am Decem ber 31 1989 UTC The Garmin device will receive this time as GMT 0 therefore the GMT offset must be calculated when using this TAIP message 10 Status ID CCCCCCCCCC 1 16 Status ID to be set For example to change the current Driver Status use the following message gt SXAGMKS000000000106202334750000000001 lt Antares SB will reponse like this to confirm that the Driver Status was changed gt RXAGMKS000000000106202334750000000001 ID Test lt To query the current Driver Status gt QXAGMKS lt CY 233 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE Antares SB will reponse like this gt RXAGMKS000000000106202334750000000001 ID Test lt 6 42 6 XAGMR Garmin Mode Add or Delete Canned Replies Qualifiers Q S R To add or del
183. full list There are some messages which are an extension to the normal TAIP reference for which the Message Identifier is XA these messages have a secondary identifier which is formed by the two characters following the XA identifier Extended messages are also described on the TAIP reference chapter The format of a data string depends on the message qualifier and the message identifier The formats for each messages are described on the TAIP reference chapter These flags are controlled by the RM message They allow Antares SB to use certain features explained below The unit can be configured to output every message with the vehicle s ID The default ID is set to 0000 The Antares SB will check all incoming messages for ID if no ID is specified the unit will accept the message If the ID is included in messages but does not compare with the ID previously set the message will be ignored Antares SB can be configured to use its unique IMEI number as DCT 62 G EC Flag Echo CR Flag Carriage Return ER Flag Error CS Flag Checksum 3 9 TAIP CONSOLE reporting ID See the configuration chapter for more information When this flag is set Antares SB will echo any correct Set mes sage S qualifier with the corresponding Response message R qualifier For example when setting the unit s ID with the TAIP message gt SIDTest lt If the EC Flag is act
184. g Metrics reset is performed by the user with the same XAIT message Notice that the unit could also be programmed to to this automatically by adding the reset command on an event s user action field For example the Driving Metrics can be reset any time the vehicle s ignition is turned off and after sending the Driving Metrics of the last trip The acceleration is measured in Miles per Hour per Second This is how much the speed increases or decreases on a second basis For example if a vehicle goes from 0 to 32mph in 4 seconds the resulting acceleration will be of 32 4 8 Miles h s When a vehicle breaks the resulting acceleration is measured in the same manner but it will be shown as negative Typical good values stay between 13 and 13 but what are good and what are bad values is something that has to be determinated by each client in a comparative manner between good and bad drivers Driving Metrics information is consulted and reset via the XAIT command See the TAIP chapter for detailed information To query the actual driving metrics resume send to the unit gt QXAITR lt The unit responds something like gt RXAITR 03 09 10 041 ID EXAMPLE lt This particular reading indicates that the actual acceleration is 3Miles h s or MPH s the maximum acceleration since the last Driving Metrics re set has been 9Miles h s and the maximum negative acceleration maxi mum breaking has been 10Miles h s The maxim
185. g region index See the GR message 83 No space available for cells format 84 At least one subscribed cell can not format 85 Found illegal characters on a Destination Point definition See the XADP message 86 Can not change a GPIOs mask GF on this product Only the FO value is accepted See the GF message The table continues on the next page CT 289 yq 6 85 ERRORS LIST Continued from the previous page ID Description 87 Problem with the Canned Reply ID Try a new ID 88 Wrong point index See the GR message 89 Checksum error Missmatch or checksum was not present in the response message 90 Unavailable feature 91 Operation not allowed Verify that the MDT mode is not active before trying to enable Garmin Mode 92 Canned Reply could not be removed 93 Invalid Canned Reply count Send a Canned Reply Text Message using 1 to 6 Canned Replies 94 Canned Reply ID does not exist in the list 95 Invalid or duplicated Canned Reply ID 96 Internal flash memory error Can not save on flash 97 Event code alredy in use 98 Feature not implemented on the Garmin device 99 GPS data temporarily unavailable If this situation persists for more than 30 seconds you may have a hardware problem It is normal to get this error when a GPS request is issued too soon after power up 290 z G 7 Appendix A Quick Start Gui
186. g the Distance threshold it will not activate the signal too frequently no more frequent than the configured minimum time value One way of seeing this parameter is that this time will be the report period when the vehicle is moving too fast A Time and Distance counter is created with the following parameters 1 Distance Threshold 2 Minimum Time 3 Maximum Time 204 lO 6 25 TD TIME AND DISTANCE SIGNALS CONFIGURATION The TD message allows to configure the parameters that control the Time 3 Dis tance signals trigger Ten TD counters may de defined independantely The message has the following format ABBBB CCCCDDDDEEEE Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 TD index A 0 9 Time and distance index 4 Minimum BBBB seconds Minimum amount of time elapsing Time between reports To enable just time reporting this is the only parameter to set and the others should be set to O Setting this value to O disables the report 4 reserved CCCC This parameter is ignored and can have any value 4 Distance DDDD x100 Distance the unit must travel be meters tween reports Each unit represents 100 meters 4 Maximum EEEE seconds Maximum amount of time elapsing Time between signals activation This pa rameter is only relevant when dis tance reporting is desired If set to 0 there is no limit to the amount of time between reports 205 Y 6 26 TX TEXT MESSAGE 6 26 TX
187. ge e EV Event report Use V as Message ID on an event definition See the ED message e extended EV As mentioned on the Reports messages section of the Operation chapter the EV report can include extra information tags To do so the Message IDs A B and C of an event definition are used The information tags for messages IDs A B and C are defined with the XAEF command For more information see the ED EV and XAEF TAIP messages See also the Scenarios and examples section An user defined action is defined by a user specified TAIP message or set of messages that are appended at the end of a regular event definition using the ACT string This enables the user to predefine TAIP messages that the unit will only process whenever the trigger goes off This is specially useful when making the unit drive outputs automatically For example The unit may automatically without asking a remote server user shut a vehicle s engine off whenever a vehicle is trying to move on a forbidden out of labor time It is also helpful when driving the unit s counters to cre ate complex reporting scenarios Any TAIP command available on the TAIP console can be predefined as 9 With the routing options a single destination or a group of destinations may be specified This makes the unit able of sending the same report to several destinations at the same time 10 This feature is useful when using events to trigger other events or when a user
188. ge we set the limit gt SGS0710650 lt Now any time the vehicle speed is above 65mph the S07 signal is going to be true In order for the violation to be reported only after a continuous 15 seconds condition a timer has to be initiated whenever the speed goes above 65mph To do so we create a silent event that is it an event which only function is to start a timer but not to send any report gt SED40SVO0 507 ACT SGCOOTCO0015 lt We used event 40 for no particular reason other than it is free to be used The event triggers whenever S07 signal changes to true that is it whenever the vehicle s speed goes beyond 65mph The event includes an user action Starting timer 00 with a threshold value of 15 seconds This will make signal COO go true 15 seconds after the counter definition that is it 15 seconds after the speed violation is detected 5 6 3 Creating the violation report Having COO signal become true 15 seconds after the speed violation the only thing left to do is create the violation event the event 10 gt 5SED10NV4 C00 lt This one as you can see is not a silent event It sends a report to DA 4 which according to the example we have been working points to the remote AVL server 5 6 4 Something is missing 5 6 5 Driving the LED So far so good it does what it is asked But we are missing a silent event which turns off the counter whenever the driver slows down before the 15 seconds or else the violation is g
189. ges See the XADP message for more information on this The Antares SB reporting messages that have to be interpreted by the AVL software server are the EV and ET messages See the TAIP reference when developing an AVL application capable of extracting the report information from these messages See also the Reports messages section on the Operation chapter Using Short Message Peer to Peer Protocol SMPP or a dedicated GSM modem connected via USB or serial port 95 y Q 4 5 Event Machine Essential configuration 4 5 1 Triggers Note 4 5 EVENT MACHINE The unit s reporting is controlled by an Event Machine which constantly evaluates user defined events These events allow the user to create a re porting schema and functionality controlled by triggers and actions Events can be consulted or configured at any time with the ED message throughout the TAIP console enabling the user to alter the Event Machine parameters at any time locally or over the air Up to 50 events may be defined on the unit These events are evaluated on a sequential order based on the event s ID This means that lower IDs are evaluated first Having this in mind an event s ID may be relevant if its trigger depends on other events signals and or on other events user defined actions The whole 50 events evaluation is performed at a 1 second rate This section examines the events components triggers and
190. gistration status can be consulted with the RP message and or with the Signal led For more information consult the TAIP reference and the Leds subsection on the Operation chapter When the unit is GSM registered it is able to make or receive telephone calls and 2 way SMS communication The PIN parameter can not be changed over the air This to prevent the unit from loosing the GSM GPRS network when an incorrect PIN is tried remotely The PIN value can only be mod ified over the serial port 4 Any PIN value will work when using a no PIN SIM card DCT 91 y Q 4 2 ENABLING THE UNIT ON GSM AND GPRS 4 2 2 Access Point Name APN for GPRS set up Note A GPRS session enables the unit to communicate with IP networks IP addresses Although the most common IP network is the Internet by specifying an APN the cellular carrier can enable your unit s to work on a user private IP network that does not necessarily communicate with the In ternet Among other advantages discussed on the Operation chapter when using a private APN devices like the Antares Cellular Phones PDAs PCs Servers etc can only be accessed by devices on the same APN There are several reasons why a cellular carrier may use different APNs but the im portant thing is that an APN is needed for the unit to start a GPRS session for it to be able to send and receive data over IP networks The most common situation is an APN with Internet access
191. git number for each DA found It also returns the DP that generated the query message For example gt QXASD lt May return gt RXASD POOPO1P10P11P14 AOOA01A02 POO lt Indicating that DPs 00 01 10 11 and 14 are defined DAs 0 1 and 2 are de fined and that the gt QXASD lt message was sent from DP 00 See the XADP and DP messages for more information 270 Y 6 69 XASF STORE FORWARD BUFFER 6 69 XASF Store amp Forward Buffer Qualifiers Q R Use this message to consult the reports buffer state of a given Destination The message has the following format AA BBBBB CCCCC DDDDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Destination AA 00 14 Destination Point Point 5 Total capacity BBBBB integer Total buffer capacity expressed on events 5 Used space CCCCC integer Number of events accumulated on the buffer 5 reserved DDDDD integer Reserved for technical support 271 A O 6 70 XASG SMS MESSAGES GATEWAY 6 70 XASG SMS Messages Gateway Qualifiers Q S R The SMS Messages Gateway allows Antares SB to send any text message through a TAIP message Antares SB will retry to send the message up to three times if it fails to send it the message will be canceled The message has the following format que using the S qualifier ABB CCC Chars I
192. gnal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input report event gt SEDOSNV4 IP3 lt end 9 Appendix C Signals Table For more information on signals refer to the Configuration chapter Event Machine section The available signals for the Antares SB are presented in the next table on the next page ID Signal Description A00 A09 Destination Points state True when the IP address port defined on the corresponding Destination Point s index is accepting a TCP connection or when using UDP i e the TCP UDP socket is open See the XADP message BOO B04 Battery Levels True when the unit s back up battery level is above the value defined with the XAGB message C00 C19 Counters Timers Distancers True when the corresponding counter reaches its defined threshold value See the GC message DOO D04 ADC Levels True when the ADC input voltage level is above the value defined with the XAGA message E00 E49 Event Triggers True when the corresponding event trigger is True See the ED message FOO Ignition True when the ignition input of the unit is on F01 GPS Fix True when doing GPS fixes F02 GSM GPRS Roaming True when the unit is Roaming on GSM GPRS F03 GSM Registered True when the unit is registered in the GSM network F04 GPS Antenna Feed line fault Indicates a short on the GPS antenna cable F05 GPRS Registered True when the unit
193. gt SED19NV4 F00 lt Both events routing actions indicate that the destination of the report is the DA 4 and that EV is the reporting message to generate Both events use a simple trigger consisting of a one signal only condition FOO which is the vehicle s ignition signal Creating an event to detect when the vehicle leaves a defined region When a vehicle is outside the perimeter defined by the polygon that de fines a region the corresponding region s signal is set to false To generate an event whenever a vehicle leaves the region the region s signal has to be monitored for the true to false transition this is done with the minus sign on the event s trigger gt SED24NV7 R26 lt This event is going to be reported to DA 7 which has to be defined be fore the event occurs so the Event Machine can generate the report to a valid group of DPs The region has to be defined too To do so use the GR message This is the only signal defining message that requires more than a single command to configure the signal This because as specified on the TAIP reference the GR message defines not a whole region but a region s single point One example for the definition of region 26 using three points is gt 5GR26001 8021500 025795009999 lt gt 5GR26011 8024444 025840550099 lt gt SGR2602U 8017861 025849440001 lt 4 6 Using Polygonal Regions The Antares SB supports detecting when a vehicle is inside or outside of up to 30 us
194. gt SXATMOSInput 3 has been activated lt Ignition sense Ignition ON event gt SED19NV4 F00 lt Ignition OFF event gt SED20NV4 FOO lt Speed viol warning Set an speed limit of 65mph gt 5G50710650 lt Start a 15 secs timer when speed limit is violated silent event gt SED40SVO S07 ACT SGCOOTCO0015 lt Stop the timer when the speed falls below the limit silent event gt SED415V0 S07 ACT SGCOOUK lt 147 5 8 SAFE ENGINE TURN OFF Create the violation report gt SED10NV4 C00 lt Drive a LED on output 1 ON when the speed goes beyond the limit silent event gt SED42SVO S07 ACT SSSXP11 lt Drive a LED on output 1 OFF when the speed falls off the limit silent event gt SED43SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP10 lt START STOP monitoring Speed limit for START STOP detection gt 5GS0310080 lt Start a 2 minutes timer gt SED38SV0 S03 ACT SGC01TCO00120 lt Stop the timer gt SED39SVO SO03 ACT SGCO1U lt Create the STOP report gt SEDSONV4 CO1 lt Create the START report gt SED31NV4 SO03C01 amp lt end 5 8 Safe engine turn off This configuration is used to drive an output high after a user command4 only when the following condition is met The vehicle stays under a given low speed limit for a given period of time This is suitable for connecting an ignition cutter to the
195. has no left neighbors because the only point connected to it is 02 but it has the same longitude and we already counted this connection on the previous point This leaves us with Left Neighbor 1 99 Left Neighbor 2 99 188 6 13 GR REGIONS Another approach would have been counting 02 as left neighbor Note of point 03 but then we must be careful of not including 03 as left neighbor of point 02 e Point 04 Left Left e Point 05 Left Left Example Region C A general example Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor 00 99 03 04 Left neighbors e Point 00 Left Left e Point 01 Left Left e Point 02 Left Left Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor 99 99 99 99 00 99 189 6 13 GR REGIONS e Point 03 Left Neighbor 1 00 Left Neighbor 2 01 e Point 04 Left Neighbor 1 01 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 05 Left Neighbor 1 06 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 06 Left Neighbor 1 02 Left Neighbor 2 99 Point 07 has two left neighbors that share the same longitude Only in this case you can choose either point as left neighbor 1 and the other as left neighbor 2 Left Neighbor 1 Left Neighbor 2 04 05 190 6 14 ID IDENTIFICATION 6 14 ID Identification Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to set query unit s ID The message has the following
196. he Safe engine turn off example is configured so that a user signal activation starts the safe engine turn off process This user signal activation is not done on the script as it is not part of the configuration of the unit but of its operation Whenever a remote system tries to turn off the engine a user signal activation is performed by sending the TAIP SS command over the alr 4 15 Using Heading Deltas turn by turn report Note By using Heading Deltas a turn by turn reporting criteria can be created This is achieved by making the unit report only when the vehicle s heading changes significantly since the previous heading change report To do so the J signals are used A J signal is automatically set high whenever the vehicle s heading changes by more than the delta value defined with a XAGH message After being evaluated the signal is set to low to enable further triggers Also the heading value used for comparing the actual heading of the vehicle is updated so a new heading change can be detected Heading change detection is only done when the vehicle s speed is greater than 5mph A turn by turn report having a delta value of 45 degrees looks like DCT 116 G 4 16 DRIVING METRICS ACCELERATION MAX SPEED ETC Up to 5 heading deltas may be defined The minimum value for a heading delta is 15 degrees and the maximum is 180 A typical value that suits a turn by turn report is 45 degrees
197. he current value of the Virtual Odometer or to set a new value for it This mesasage can also be used to configure up to five distance thresholds associated with the L signals A Control Signal can also be configured which instructs the Virtual Odometer to only increment its value when the Control Signal is True This message has the following format A BB CCC DDDDDDDDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action A flag V Set Query the Virtual Odometer current value T Set Query a Virtual Odometer threshold C Set Query the Control Signal 2 Threshold Index BB 00 04 3 Control Signal LCCC flag IGN Ignition control F13 External Power control IPx Input control x 1 to 4 U Disable Control Signal 9 Value DDDDDDDDD integer Virtual Odometer value or Threshold value Use U to undefine a Thresh old Examples To set the Virtual Odometer with the actual vehicle s odometer in this case 10458 meters use the following message gt SXAVOV000010458 lt To create a threshold of 500km use the following message gt SXAVOTOO000500000 lt To delete a threshold use gt SXAVOTU lt To use the vehicle s ignition as Control Signal use the following message gt SXAVOC IGN lt To disable the use of a Control Signal gt SXAVOCU lt 285 Y 6 84 XAVS Speaker volume Qualifiers S R Q 6 84 XAVS SPEAKER VOLUME This command is used to
198. he file can contain user comments These are user defined texts that have no meaning for the unit Comments are created to help reading or un derstanding the configuration messages To create a comment start a new line with the hash symbol and write ANY TEXT THAT DOES NOT CONTAIN THE gt OR lt CHARACTERS For example This is a valid comment This lt is not gt a valid comment If one line is not enough for the comment a new comment line has to be created for example This is a long comment that spans to more than one line of text Comments are not passed to the unit they are only saved on the tmf file and can not be retrieved when reading an script from an unit Here it is an example of an script file Antares SB script Getting Started example Unit s ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIM s PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt A Destination Address holding the 18 By using third party softwares TAIP Downloader can pass read an entire script over the air b i 126 e Ul 4 28 USING SCRIPTS server destination gt SDA4 POO lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input report event gt SEDOSNV4 IP3 lt end 4 28 1 Creating an script from scratch
199. he report of ignition cut off will be sent to the AVL sever and the Phone Number 912345678 Now any time someone activates the user signal 00 and after a low speed time condition event 13 will set output 4 ON cutting the ignition of the vehicle But as with the previous examples something is missing 5 8 4 Stopping the counter As it was done on the other examples we need to stop the counter when ever the speeds goes beyond the limit this to assure that if the time speed condition is violated the engine won t be turned off gt SED15SV0 501 ACT SGCO2U lt 5 8 5 Restore the user signal The only thing left to do is to restore the user signal so any time later when the ignition is restored the safe engine turn off mechanism is not triggered again without any user command gt 5SED165V0 E13 ACT SSSU000 lt DCT 149 Y 5 8 6 Script 5 8 SAFE ENGINE TURN OFF Adding a safe engine turn off option leads to the following script Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting SMS interaction Voice interaction Ignition sense Speed viol and warning START STOP monitoring Safe engine turn off Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Essential configurations Units ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIMs PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remo
200. here is at least one for each peer the unit has sent reports to The UDP origin port is the only solution for interrogating a unit that is behind a NAT which is the case on the majority of units that have Internet access Notice that the UDP origin port can be set to a fixed value this is only useful on units which work on the same network as the AVL server s remote peer s because when units work behind a NAT the origin port seen by the remote peer is always set by NAT rules no matter Antares SB uses a fixed value The unit may accept TAIP queries coming from any of the 10 possible UDP origin ports and also from the UDP server port The server port which is only useful when the unit works on the same network as the AVL server is not enabled by default DCT 58 8 G Server address validation 3 8 OVER THE AIR When working with TCP a server sending TAIP queries to Antares SB is validated through the TCP connection which is always initi ated by the unit For incoming UDP datagrams there are two mechanism the unit uses to validate the remote peer AVL server 1 First the unit tries to match the remote peer address with the UDP Network set with the XAUN command If the remote peer address does not match the UDP network or if the UDP network is not defined default state the second validation mechanism is performed 2 The second validation is done according to the Destination Points list If the server
201. hich is allowed to interact with the UDP Server port This is achieved with the XAUN message When an UDP network is set the unit uses it first to validate an incoming query on the UDP Server port if the peer s IP address matches the UDP Network a response is sent too the peer If it does not match with the UDP Network it tries to find a match on any of the IP type UDP defined Destinations if a match is found a response is generated to the IP UDP Port defined on the matching Destination Finally if no match is found the query is silently discarded Regardless of this parameter being set or not the unit always listens on the dynamic UDP port generated when a report is transmitted to a UDP destination The message has the following format AAAAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 Server Port AAAAA 00000 Server Port A sets the listening UDP port for the 65535 unit Using 00000 makes the unit not to listen on a fixed listening port it will continue listening on the dynamic UDP port created when UDP reports are transmitted T The response is sent by interchanging Source Port with Destination Port Source and Destination ports are not interchanged An UDP datagram is gen erated having Source Port randomly set and Destination Port set to the value configured with the XADP message corresponding to the matching Destination 280 Y 6 79 XAVC Voice Call Start Qualifiers S R
202. ial configuration This parameter is only meaningful to the AVL software which is going to receive reporting messages from the unit It is not necessary for the unit to work but it may necessary for making a Getting Started test with an AVL software The unit s ID is a 10 characters maximum string containing any charac ter but lt or gt The initial value is 0000 The ID is used every time the unit sends a TAIP report message EV or ET by adding the postfix ID UNIT S ID to the message This postfix gives the AVL software information on who is sending the report The AVL software may use the gt QID lt query to ask for the unit s ID once and only a new TCP connection is established The ID postfix may be then eliminated from the unit s reports with the RM message this saves a few consumption bytes Refer to the TAIP reference for more information The ID setting takes the following form for an unit s ID UNIT 0015 gt SIDUNIT 0015 lt 4 2 Enabling the unit on GSM and GPRS Essential configuration The GSM registration as well as the GPRS attachment getting a valid IP address from the cellular operator is automatically done by the unit all the time This means that whenever there is GSM and GPRS network availability and the unit is correctly configured it is going to be GPRS attached The green On Line LED solid or blinking and GSM registered The orange signal LED blinking or off For this
203. information see the XAKL message 3 14 Virtual Odometer The Virtual Odometer is used to count the total travelled distance Meaning that its value will be preserved even after an unexpected power loss reset The Virtual Odometer is configured with the XAVO TAIP message This TAIP message also configures up to 5 thresholds associated with the L signals which can be used to create reports The VO Extended EV message Format can be used to consult the value of the Virtual Odometer For more information on the Virtual Odometer refer to the XAVO TAIP message 3 15 Authentication Mechanism An AVL server can use the Authentication Mechanism to validate incoming TCP connections from Antares SB to prevent fake reports Antares SB must be configured with a password that is known by the server The password can not be consulted in Antares SB by any means The AVL server will validate the connection by sending a random challenge text to Antares SB This challenge text and the password will be used to calculate a MD5 checksum value which Antares SB will send back to the server The server will then compare the value received from Antares SB with its own calculated MD5 checksum value and depending of the result the server can reject the connection or perform any other action con figured in the server The XAPW TAIP message is used to configure the password in Antares SB The XAAU TAIP message is used to send the challege text to the serve
204. ing messages only to the serial port 10 13 Creating a turn by turn heading change report To define a heading delta change of 45 degrees send gt SXAGHO01045 lt To define event 44 so that it sends a message to the serial port every time the DoT 301 z O 10 14 CREATING A KILOMETER COUNTER vehicle s heading delta changes by more than 45 degrees send gt SED44XV0 JOO lt 10 14 Creating a kilometer counter 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 To make a distance counter count kilometers 01000 meters send gt SGC12DC0000101000 lt To query the kilometer count of this counter send gt QGC12V lt To make the unit report the kilometer count automatically Define an event and add the XACR command to the event s user action field gt SED22XV0 F00 ACT SXACR12A3 lt In this example the event is triggered by a vehicle s ignition turn off The re ported counter is the number 12 and the Destination Address is 3 Setting an output To set output 3 high send gt SSSXP31 lt To set output 2 low send gt SSSXP20 lt Querying the state of an input To query the state of input 4 send gt QSSIP4 lt Querying the state of the vehicle ignition input Send gt QSSFO0 lt Querying the Analog to digital converter To query the voltage value at the ADC input send gt QXAAC lt 302 PQ O 10 19 QUERYING THE INTERNAL BACK UP BATTERY LEVEL 10 19 Querying the Internal
205. ions Technologies recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis However despite frequent testing and due to but not limited to criminal tam pering or electrical disruption it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected Out of Warranty Repairs Digital Communications Technologies will at its option repair or replace out of warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions Anyone returning goods to Digital Communications Technologies must first obtain an authorization number Digital Com munications Technologies will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained Products which Digital Communications Technologies determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned A set fee which Digital Communications Technologies has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time will be charged for each unit repaired Products which Digital Communications Technologies determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit Contents 0 1 Scope 0 2 Organization e 0 3 Technical Assistance About the Antares SB Tile Features a e A A A es Gas 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 1 5 1 1 6 1 1 7 1 1 8 1 1 9 1 1 10 1 1 11 1 1 12 1 1 13
206. iption gt s na POWER BACK 1 4 1 GSM Antenna connector This is a SMA Sub Miniature A connector with a female center contact Use this connector for the GSM Antenna provided with the unit 1 4 2 GPS Antenna connector This is a SMA Sub Miniature A connector with a male center con tact Use this connector for the GPS Antenna supplied with the unit The reverse polarity condition of the connector and of the GPS an tenna connector assures that the GSM and GPS antenna will not get erroneously interchanged 1 4 3 I O molex type connector This male molex type connector is used for the following signals e 4 Discrete inputs e 4 Discrete outputs e Voltage Input for the ADC converter e Ground The pin out of these signals is 5 Also called reverse polarity connector 30 a G 1 4 BACK SIDE DESCRIPTION XP makes reference to Outputs IP to Inputs For information on inputs outputs and ADC see the Operation chapter The I O Harness female molex type receptacle supplied with the unit is configured as follows Signal Color IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4 White and brown White and red White and orange White and yellow ADC White XP1 XP2 XP3 XP4 Blue and brown Blue and red Blue and orange Blue and yellow GND Black 1 4 4 Power ignition molex type connector This male molex type connector is used for the connection vehicle s battery and for the ignition
207. is registered on the GPRS network F08 GPRS Attached True when the unit is attached to the GPRS network F09 MDT PAD Mode True when the unit is in MDT PAD mode See the MT message F10 PAD message True when an MDT message is received on the serial port when PAD mode is ON See the MT message F11 Woke Up True when the unit wakes up after sleep power mode Im mediately reset after the first events evaluation See the XAPM message F12 12volts 24volts detector True when the main supply voltage is above 16 volts F13 Power True when the unit s main power supply is on F14 Cell ID change This signal transitions to True when the unit registers in a new cell G00 G07 General Purpose Input Outputs These signals are true when the corresponding GPIO is true See the SS and GF messages HOO H04 Store amp Forward Thresholds True when the ammount of messages stored in the S amp F Buffer exceeds the corresponding threshold value See the XAGF message IP1 IP4 Inputs True when the corresponding input is on See the SS mes sage JOO J04 Heading Deltas True when the vehicle s heading change is greater than the corresponding heading change threshold The signal is im mediately reset after evaluation to achieve a turn by turn report See the SXAGH message KOO K99 Circular Regions True when the vehicle is inside the corresponding Circular Region See the SXAGR and XAIR messages LOO L04 Virtual Odometer Thresholds True when
208. istance signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input report event gt SEDOSNV4 IP3 lt end You can copy and paste this script to a new empty text file and have it save with a tmf extension so TAIP Downloader software can pass it to a unit See the Using Scripts section of the Operation chapter for information on creating editing and downloading scripts 5 2 Adding SMS reporting Based on the Getting Started example SMS reporting is added On this example we are going to make the unit report the previously defined Input report IP3 to a Phone Number as well as to the remote AVL server with a custom text message 5 2 1 Create the SMS Destination Point The first step is configuring the destination Phone Number on one of the unit s Phone Number Type Destination Point DPs 10 to 14 For no par ticular reason we choose DP 10 The number we are going to configure on DP 10 is 912345678 See an special note about some Phone Numbers variations on the Over The Air section of the Operation chapter gt SXADP1010912345678 lt Refer to the XADP message for more information on the command Notice the underlined 1 With this we are indicating that events mes sages sent to DP 10 are always going to be user defined texts not TAIP EV messages The 0 next to the underlined 1 is not relevant for this example but it is going to be important for the ne
209. it is immediately reset after the first events evaluation S00 S09 Speed thresholds True when the vehicle s speed is faster than the correspond ing speed threshold See the GS message TOO T09 Time Windows True when the time and date are within the corresponding time window See the GT message TDO TD9 Time and Distance True when the associated Time and Distance counter has a Time and Distance condition true The signal is immedi ately reset after being evaluated to enable the counter for further triggers See the TD message U0O U09 User flags These signals may be changed by the user at any time with the SS message Voo V05 Voice signals VOO signal is true when there is a voice call on course VO1 to VO5 are true whenever the actual voice call is being held to Destination Point 10 to 14 respectively See the VC VE and XADP messages XP1 XP4 Outputs True when the corresponding output is on See the SS mes sage CT 105 y 4 5 EVENT MACHINE Antares SB does not have GPIOs These signals are maintained for backwards compatibility with scripts from other versions Instead Antares SB has 4 inputs and 4 outputs Signals G00 G03 are the same as IP1 IP4 signals and G04 GO7 signals are the same as XP1 XP4 signals The user is encouraged to use IP and XP signals instead of G signals These signals state can be direct
210. ital Communications Technologiess liability for failure to repair the product under this war ranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty Under no circumstances shall Digital Communications Technologies be liable for any special incidental or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty breach of contract negligence strict liability or any other legal theory Such damages include but are not limited to loss of profits loss of the product or any associated equipment cost of capital cost of substitute or replacement equipment facilities or services down time purchasers time the claims of third parties including customers and injury to property Disclaimer of Warranties This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties whether expressed or implied including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Communica tions Technologies Digital Communications Technologies neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the State of Florida USA WARNING Digital Communicat
211. itch ANTARES GPS To vehicle s chassis battery 41 yq 2 1 POWER SUPPLY Power switch Vehicle s ile battery i sat Power switch To vehicle s chassis To vehicle s electrical system ANTARES GPS To vehicle s electrical system ANTARES GPS le s ery 42 yq 2 2 Inputs detection 2 3 Ignition detection 2 2 INPUTS DETECTION For the general purpose inputs the electrical conditions are as follows Logical State Electrical State Active OV to 1V Inactive 2 9V to 32V or Open A typical input configuration consists of the input connected trough a switch to GND This makes the input float whenever the switch is off indicating to the unit that the input is open and makes the input go to OV when the switch is close indicating an ON condition to the unit L sw ANTARES GPS A voltage detection can be used too e Any voltage above 2 9V on the input will be indicated as OFF inactive e Any voltage below 1V on the input will be indicated as ON active It is normal to see a 3 4V approx voltage on the Antares SB Inputs when nothing is conencted to it This voltage is set on purpose through a pull up circuit 50kOhm resistors in order to fix a inactive state when there is nothing connected to the Inputs The pull up circuit also allows to connect an open drain or open collector output of a device directly to Antares S
212. ith its corresponding answer To use the Command Session ID it is only required to apend the Session ID message to a TAIP message sent to Antares If a TAIP message contains the SI xxxx characters the response to this message will include those same characters The maximum length of a Session ID message is 10 alphanumeric characters For example to query the Antares SB version using the Session ID use gt QVR ST 123ABC lt The response will include the Session ID used gt RVR ANTARES GPS 05 30 S5I 123ABC ID test lt The lt character signifies end of a sentence and is used as the message delimiter 3 9 2 Reporting messages 3 9 3 Interacting The unit output messages when a command or query is sent or when reporting an event message generated by the Event Machine These messages are either the EV or ET messages See the TAIP reference for information on how to get the information contained on these reports TAIP communication must be driven by a timeout retry mechanism 3 10 Remote host software The Antares SB is designed to interact with Automated Vehicle Location AVL servers which have the ability of interpreting TAIP messages In this document AVL server AVL system AVL host AVL appli cation remote peer all make reference to the same thing A piece of server type software which receives and makes some sense of the Antares SB reports It also may have the capability of sending DCT 64 y 3
213. ive Antares SB will reply with gt RIDTest ID Test lt If the EC Flag is inactive Antares SB will not return a reply to the message When this flag is set Antares SB will append a Carriage Return and Line Feed to every response or report When this flag is set Antares SB will enable error message re sponses For example when the ER flag is active and an incorrect A TM q g message is sent to Antares SB it will reply with a error message gt Qid lt gt REROO Qid ID Test lt If the ER flag is inactive Antares SB will not return a reply to the message When this flag is set Antares SB will response every message with its checksum value When this flag is active all the messages sent to Antares SB must contain the CS flag with the corresponding checksum value or Antares SB will reply with Error 89 For exam ple when the CS flag is active the response message will contain the checksum value gt RRM CS_FLAG T 4C lt If the message sent to Antares SB does not have the checksum value of the message it will reply with Error 89 gt QID lt gt RER89 QID ID Check 40 lt DCT 63 G SI Flag Command Session Message Delimiter 3 10 REMOTE HOST SOFTWARE gt QID 73 lt gt RIDCheck ID Check 7B lt The SI flag is an Optional Report flag but it is not controlled by the RM TAIP message The Command Session ID allows an AVL server to associate each TAIP message w
214. ize this could take from 5 to 40 seconds The communication process is shown on the TAIP message history field If a TAIP command defined on the script is not recognized by the unit TAIP Downloader alerts the user and asks him whether to Cancel the writing process or to skip the message causing the error DCT 87 G 3 22 TAIP DOWNLOADER TOOL WRITE READ SCRIPTS 3 22 5 Read a Configuration Script 3 22 6 Over The Air When reading an Antares SB an script file tmf file containing an unit s configuration is created This script can be edited and passed to other units to replicate a configuration To generate an script file based on an unit s configuration on TAIP Downloader select Device Read configura tion This process takes approximately 1 minute TAIP Downloader can not communicate remotely with devices by itself But using third party softwares a virtual serial port can be created so that the virtual communication is done via TCP or UDP This enables reading and writing scripts Over The Air One of such tools that creates a virtual serial port connected trough a TCP connection is HW Virtual Serial Port which can be found at http www HW group com Remember that the Antares SB works as a TCP client so HW Virtual Serial Port has to be configured as server To do so make sure to select the option HW VSP works as the TP Server only box on the software
215. larity connector 38 a 2 Installation 2 1 Power Supply The Antares SB can be installed in any location of any type of vehicle as long as some environmental conditions are met e No exposure to water e No direct exposure to direct sun light e Away from excessive heat sources like the motor or the exhaust s path e Away from excessive cold sources like a truck s refrigerator or AC system e Not attached to a highly vibrating structure The unit s location position can be such that it remains hidden The LEDs indicators do not have to be visible but it is recommended some access to them for failure diagnostics situations The same recommendation holds for physical access to the unit s serial port The unit s power cables can be directly connected to the vehicle s battery 12 or 24 volts The maximum voltage the unit can take is 32V When using the unit outside a vehicle use a 12Volts DC adapter that supplies a minimum current of 800mA 2 1 1 Vehicles with a main power switch When the vehicle has a main power switch to cut restore the battery voltage some recommendations have to be followed e If the switch disconnects the positive voltage of the vehicle s battery the Antares SB can be connected before or after the switch When connected before it will keep on receiving the vehicle s power whenever the switch is off If it is connected after the switch the unit will run with its optional back up b
216. left to do is defining an event that triggers with this condition At this point we need to ask ourselves what event code to chose and what kind of message send to the AVL server The answer lies on the AVL server configuration The event code has to have any meaning for the AVL software and the type of message depends on the kind of information we will like to get from the unit s report There are two kind of messages the EV gives more information than the ET which only gives the time and date when the event occurred In order to receive full GPS information we need to use the EV report As event code 00 49 we chose for no special reason code 37 gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Notice we are using DA 4 This will make the report generated by event 37 to be sent to the single DP 00 which is our AVL server For more information consult the ED message on the TAIP reference 5 1 7 Checking the host software server A this point and as long as the On line LED remains solid an EV message should be arriving to the AVL server every 5 minutes The software has to be able to interpret TAIP EV and or ET messages If you run into troubles checking your AVL application you can always shut it down an use some popular free TCP listener applications that will show you the RAW data where you can check the TAIP messages generated by the Antares SB Other useful tool is a network sniffer that allows you to analyze the traffic on a given TCP UDP connection while
217. lient Mode it will indicate the DP from which the ACK was received If an ACK was re ceived via the UDP network while in Server Mode this field will be only 2 digits long and its value will be US When a package that is not an ACK is received while in server mode the value will be 016 1 to 20 Message CCC This field will only be used when the package is received via UDP It contains a posible UDP ACK If it is rec ognized as a valid UDP ACK the Direction indicator qualifier s value will be A If it is not recognized as a valid UDP ACK then the value of the Direction indica tor qualifier will be a If the package is larger than 20 bytes it will only show the first 20 bytes 6 75 1 Example Activate the TAIP sniffer gt SXATS1 lt Now if the IP type DP 03 channel 004 sends a gt QGS00 lt to the unit the unit will send to the serial port the following messages gt RXATSI 004 lt gt QGS00 lt gt RXATSO 004 lt gt RGSOOU lt Notice the underlined indicators They show that the incomming message from channel 004 was gt QGSS00 lt and the outgoing message to the same channel was gt RGSOOU lt b i 277 Y 6 76 XAUN UDP NETWORK 6 76 XAUN UDP Network Qualifiers S Q R An UDP Network can be set as a validation mechanism for UDP queries orig inated to the unit s UDP Server Port configured with the XAUP message The UDP Net
218. lifiers Q R Use this message to consult the actual computed value of the ADC The message has the following format AAAAAPBBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 ADC Com AAAAA millivolts ADC computed value Average value puted volt over a 10 seconds interval of the ADC age input voltage ADC voltage range is 0 32V 1 Indicator P fixed The P character separates voltage from percentage value 3 Percent BBB percentage ADC percentage based on the O to 32V range 212 A O 6 29 XAAU CHALLENGE TEXT 6 29 XAAU Challenge Text Qualifiers Q R Use this message to send the Challenge Text to Antares SB in order to authen ticate the connection The message has the following format ABBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 5 Method A flag M MD5 flag 4 80 Challenge BBB varies When sending this message to Text Antares SB this is any random text that will be used by the Authenti cation Mechanism Antares SB will reply with the result of encrypting the password and the challenge text For example the server sends the following message to Antares SB to begin the authentication process gt QXAAUMchallenge_text lt Antares SB will then reply with the following message gt RXAAUMoperation_result lt Where operation_result is obtained from the operation MD5 MD5 password challenge_text The server
219. lizing 2 Can not communicate with the Interface 3 Detecting vehicle 4 Busy 5 Communicating with Interface OK Updating OBD values 2 Supported Pa CC Hex Hex code representing the supported param rameter eter 00 Speed 01 Engine Speed RPM 02 Throttle position 03 Odometer 04 Fuel Level 05 Remaining Gallons 08 Ignition Status 09 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL OC Fuel Rate 22 Trip Odometer 99 Secondary Tool Status Varies Parameter DDD Varies Value of the supported parameter identified Value by CC Varies depending of the parameter For example when using gt QXADSO lt Antares may respond gt RXADSOO lt This indicates that Antares is not in OBD mode therefore it can t communicate with the Interface If communication with Interface is working the same query may result in CT 261 6 62 XAOS OBD STATUS CONSULT gt RXA0S05 00 01 02 08 09 22 99 lt Indicating that communication is OK and the parameters that can be updated from the vehicle are Speed Engine Speed Throttle position Ignition MIL Trip Odometer and Secondary Tool status All other parameters are not supported by the Interface model connected to Antares SB when reading a particular vehicle Furthermore using gt QXADS1 lt will return something like gt RXA0S15 00 000 01 00823 02 013 08 1 09 1 22 000425 99 0 lt Indicating Speed Omph Engine Speed 823 RPM Throttle at 13
220. ll generate an EV report having the extra information tags that give information on the vehicle s altitude and on the vehicle s acceleration and let us set event 32 to generate an extended report having the vehicle s acceleration number of satellites and the state of Distance Counter 7 First we have to configure the extended format that it is going to be used by events 30 and 31 let us use the extended format XAEF A According to the XAEF message the tags corresponding to altitude and acceleration are AL and AC So we set extended format A as gt SXAEFA AL AC lt Now let us define extended format C to be used by event 32 gt SXAEFC AC SV CVO7 lt Having set the extended formats define the events For this example we are going to trigger the events with inputs gt SED30NA2 IP1 lt gt SED31NA2 IP2 lt gt SED32NC2 IP3 lt 6 See the XAEF message for a list of available information tags DCT 161 Y 5 14 GENERATING AN EXTENDED EV REPORT Notice that events 30 and 31 use the same Message ID as they report the same extended information Event 32 uses as Message ID the letter C We could also have configured extended format B instead of C Now let us see the extended EV reporting messages Events 30 and 31 will be reported as gt REV301447147509 2578250 0802813901519512 AL 00003 AC 00 10 ExAMPLE lt gt REV311447147649 2578440 0802854301000512 AL 00001 AC 08 1p ExampLe lt And
221. ly altered by the user with the SS TAIP message Refer to the next paragraph Example The signals marked with a are signals for which the conditions that set them true or false are defined by the user The other signals transitions cri teria can not be altered as they depend on conditions already programmed on the unit Next a list of the signals with their corresponding config uration message e Counters signals with the GC message The corresponding signal is true whenever the counter value exceeds the threshold configured with the GC message e Events signals with the ED message These signals state depend on the logical state of the associated event trigger e Regions signals with the GR message The signal is true whenever the vehicle is inside the region defined with the GR command e Speeds signals with the GS message The signal is true whenever the vehicle s speed exceeds the threshold configured with the GS message e Time Windows signals with the GT message The signal is true when ever the actual date time lies between the minimum and maximum date time defined with the GT message e Time and Distance signals with the TD message The signal is true when the Time And Distance condition configured with the TD mes sage is met This signal has the particularity that it is immediately set to false after a complete evaluation of all the events This creates a periodic sort of signal
222. manipulatable signals See the Signals list on the Event Machine section of the Configuration chapter The message has the following format AAA B Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 Signal ID AAA See Sig 3 character identifier of the signal nals list 1 Current B 0 or 1 Status of the specified signal signal status 6 22 1 Examples Asking To know the state of the Region signal 03 gt QSSRO3 lt If the signal is OFF the vehicle is not inside region 03 the unit returns gt RSSRO30 lt If the signal is ON the vehicle is inside region 03 gt RSSRO31 lt Asking Inputs To know the state of the input 2 gt QSSIP2 lt If input 2 is inactive the unit returns gt RSSIP20 lt If input 2 is active the unit returns gt RSSIP21 lt Setting To set the user signal 08 to false gt SSSU080 lt To set it true gt SSSU081 lt Setting outputs To activate output 3 200 Y 6 22 SS SIGNAL STATUS gt SSSXP31 lt To deactivate it gt SSSXP30 lt See the Configuration and Operation chapters for more examples 201 y O 6 23 ST Status Qualifiers 6 23 ST STATUS Q R This message provides information about the unit s GPS receiver message has the following format AABCDDEFGG Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Tracking AA Hex characters 00 GPS satellite signal acq
223. message which indicates which gt RTXGMTC062023468800000001 ID Test lt TXGMTR Garmin Mode Received Text Message Unsolicited This message will be sent by Antares SB each time the user sends a text message using the Garmin device This is an unsolicited message and the server should be configured to receive this message This message will only be sent by Antares SB if the Garmin device support Application Protocol A602 or A604 The mes sage has the following format AAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBB CCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Message ID AAAAAAAAAA integer This is the message ID sent by the Garmin de vice This ID is auto incremented by Garmin with each message sent 10 Time BBBBBBBBBB seconds This is the Time and Date when the message was generated Is the number of seconds since 12 00 am December 31 1989 UTC This time will reflect the exact time and date set on the Garmin device 0 50 Message CCC varies This is the text message sent by the Garmin device screen lt can contain any set of ASCII characters The messages can be up to 50 char acters long If the message was longer that 50 characters the message will be truncated Fore example when the user sends a text message using the Garmin device Hello World Antares will send to the server a message like this gt RTXGMTRO0000001140936501600Hello World lt CT
224. mit in miles per hour per second See the Using Acceleration Signals section on the Configuration chapter for exam ples 242 z G 6 44 XAGP GPRS Pause Qualifiers Q S R 6 44 XAGP GPRS PAUSE Use this message to make the unit close any open TCP sockets and end the current GPRS session After 20 seconds the unit will start the GPRS session again The message has the following format A Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 GPRS Paused A 0 1 Use 1 to start a GPRS pause procedure For example to initiate a GPRS pause send to the unit gt SXAGP1 lt Depending on the number of open TCP sockets the response is delayed a few seconds 243 z G 6 45 XAGR CIRCULAR REGIONS 6 45 XAGR Circular Regions Qualifiers Q S R Use this message to create up to 100 circular regions based on a center s coordi nates and a radius Use the XAIR to create a circular region centered on the actual unit s GPS position The message has the following format AABCCCDDDDEEEEFFFFGGGGGGHHHHHH Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 index AA 00 99 Region index 1 action B 1 U Use 1 to define a region U to undefine it 7 Center s lati CCC DDDD degrees Center s latitude It does include sign tude 8 Center s longi EEEE FFFF degrees Center s longitude It does include sign tude 6 Region ra
225. must do this same operation and compare the results and take action based on the comparison result The character must be included in the op eration Please refer to the Authentication Mechanism section of the Operation chapter for more information 213 A O 6 30 XABS Battery Status Qualifiers Q R 6 30 XABS BATTERY STATUS Use this message to consult the actual state of the built in back up battery The message has the following format ABBBBPCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Main A flag Indicates that the main power source Power vehicle s battery is ON 1 or OFF State 0 4 Battery BBBB millivolts Built in battery voltage voltage 1 Indicator P fixed The P character separates voltage from percentage value 3 Percent of CCC percentage Built in battery charge level charge 3 Built in back up battery is an optional add on CY 214 a 6 31 6 31 XACE CELL ENVIRONMENT XACE Cell Environment Qualifiers Q R Use this message to query Cellular Network Cell Environment information The message has the following format A BBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning Query type A 1 2 Type of query 1 Cell ID information as described out side the table 2 6 Neighbor Cells information as de scribed outside the table 1 2 Cell ID e If Cell Identity is
226. n XAFU message See the XAFU message 57 Invalid firmware server See the XAFU message 58 An over the air firmware upgrade process is already taking place 59 Invalid parameter range value 60 IP type destination supplied with no port See the XADP message 61 Telephone type destination supplied can not include port parameter See the XADP message 62 Functionality not available on this product 63 Can not initiate a new voice call There is a voice call being held 64 Can not initiate voice call The selected Destination is not defined 65 No current voice call to end 66 No password has been set for the authentication mechanism 67 Message ID already in use by the Garmin device 68 Exceeded the allowed length for this command 69 Firmware upgrade over the air is not enabled on this module 70 Garmin Mode is not enabled 71 The change ID for the Driver Status change already exists 72 The Driver Status ID does not exist 73 Driver Status list is full 74 The Driver Status could not be deleted It is currently being used 75 The Driver ID list is full 76 Invalid counter operation See the GC message 77 Invalid Counter recycle flag See the GC message 78 Counter Threshold or Value parameter required See the GC message 79 Counter command not valid for the actual recycle flag See the GC message 80 Driver ID does not exist on the list 81 Unrecognized Set message 82 Wron
227. nals Vehicle Ignition Main power detection 12volts 24volts detector for main power GPS Fix state GSM roaming state GSM registration state GPRS registration state GPRS attach state GPS Antenna short circuit state TCP connections state indicators Software reset indicator Voice call state indicators Woke Up Signal 25 8 1 2 CONTENTS OF PACKAGE 1 2 Contents of package Inside the Antares SB box you will find the following content ANTARES SB POWER HARNESS I O HARNESS bj A GSM QUAD BAND ANTENNA GPS ANTENNA e An Antares SB e A GSM Quad Band antenna ready to work with any GSM car rier regardless of its operation frequency e An active GPS antenna with magnetic support and reverse polarity connector e The I O harness 10 color coded cables 1 meter 3 28 feet long attached to a female molex type receptacle on the unit s side and open ends on the other e The Power harness 3 color coded cables 1 meter 3 28 feet long attached to a female molex type receptacle on the unit s side and open ends on the other DCT 26 4 1 3 FRONT SIDE DESCRIPTION 1 3 Front side description FRONT 1 3 1 RS 232 port DB9 female connector with all of the RS 232 signals available for se rial communication The DB9 signals pin out is o Sete A Use this port to configure or query the unit
228. nation gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80300 lt Event triggered by T amp D signal 143 E 5 7 START STOP MONITORING gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input report event gt SEDOSNV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05 gt SXATMOSInput 3 has been activated lt Ignition ON event gt SED19NV4 FOO lt Ignition OFF event gt SED20NV4 FOO lt Set an speed limit of 65mph gt 5G50710650 lt Start a 15 secs timer when speed limit is violated silent event gt SED4085V0 507 ACT SGCOOTCO0015 lt fStop the timer when the speed falls below the limit silent event gt SED41SV0 S07 ACT SGCOOUK lt Create the violation report gt SED10NV4 C00 lt Drive a LED on output 1 ON when the speed goes beyond the limit silent event gt SED42SVO S07 ACT SSSXP11 lt Drive a LED on output 1 OFF when the speed falls off the limit silent event gt SED43SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP10 lt end 5 7 START STOP monitoring In this example we are going to create two reporting events that reflect two possible situations for a vehicle a vehicle STOP and a vehicle re start or first start simply START Note This example continues working on the example that has been worked so far the Getting Started SMS reporting CT 144 PQ G 5 7 ST
229. nd an ID query thru the new connection so it can associate it to an unit s ID Unfortunately not all AVL servers do this To overcome this situation a TCP reconnection event may be configured on the unit so it sends an event every time a connection is re established with the server This gives the AVL server immediate information on who has opened the connection A reconnection event is created simply with the Axx signal corresponding to the P type destination whose reconnection is to be monitored So for our example the A00 signal has to be used as the AVL server is defined on the Destination Point 00 gt SED49NV4 A00 lt We chose event 49 for no particular reason This will have the AVL server receiving event 49 any time a new connection from an Antares SB is established The resulting script is Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting SMS interaction Voice interaction Ignition sense Speed viol and warning START STOP monitoring Safe engine turn off A better T amp D criterion Reconnection event HH tH HOH OH t tt tit Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt 157 z Q 5 10 RECONNECTION EVENT FOR TCP gt SXADP U lt Essential configurations Units ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIMs PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt S
230. nfo Changed info Changed info Changed info on GPS Module Specifications on Status on Extended EV Message Formats on IMEI as ID on UDP Origin Port on UDP Server Port on Counters Timers Distancers on Registration Parameters on Firmware Upgrade Over the air on Local Lock on Create Circular Region Here on Destinations set on TAIP Console Sniffer on Keep Alive on Voice Call End on Destinations Set on Altitude Changed Limited Warranty info Corrected example on Using Acceleration Signals Special Note This manual applies to the GSM version of the Antares SB Firmware version This manual applies to firmware version 5 30 of the GSM version of the Antares SB firmware version with the gt QVR lt TAIP command You can consult the unit s Regulatory Compliance FCC This product operates with Wavecoms Q24PL transmitter FCC Parts 22H and 24E are granted to the Wavecom Q24PL under FCC identifier O9EQ24PL001 The antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed 3 dBi at 1900 MHz 1 4 dBi at 850 MHz for mobile operating configurations and 7 dBi at 1900 MHz 1 4 dBi at 850 MHz for fixed mounted operations as defined in 2 1091 and 1 1307 of the rules for satisfying RF exposure com pliance In addition the antenna used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons GARMIN AUTHORIZED PARTNER A GARMIN b
231. ng a value of 55mph send to the unit gt 5GS50010550 lt Now an event can be created so any time the vehicle exceeds 55mph event 33 is generated DCT 109 y Q 4 10 THE TIME AND DISTANCE CRITERIA gt SED33NVO S00 lt A configuration may be created so a warning to the driver is given via a LED indicator before actually generating the event See the Scenarios and Examples section for this 4 10 The Time And Distance criteria Note Up to 10 Time And Distance T amp D criterion can be defined Time And Distance definitions are covered on the TD TAIP message A T amp D signal attached to an event generates a T amp D like report whose frequency changes according to the vehicle s displacement With this the unit increases the report frequency when the vehicle is moving accumulat ing traveled distance and decreases it when the vehicle is not moving This is more efficient than having the unit report by a time only criteria were almost all of the reports triggered when the vehicle is not moving are not relevant The unit can also be configured with a time only criteria How does this criteria work First the report has to be triggered by a distance threshold that tells the unit to send a report whenever the accumulated distance exceeds this value This distance only scheme has two problems 1 What if the vehicle goes too fast and or the distance threshold is low It will report too frequent
232. ng for TCP connections see the Operation chapter before continuing For this example we will use a server located on the address avl server com which listens for TCP connections on the port 2145 If we want to use name addresses instead of IP numbers we have to use the XADP message instead of the deprecated DP message With the XADP message we can also specify an IP number so the use of DP is obsolete and is maintained only for backward compatibility The Destination Point index we chose is only restricted in our example by the DPs destinate to be IP hosts 00 to 09 We chose then DP 00 for no other special reason gt SXADPOOQOOav1 server com 2145 lt An IP address could also be specified Supposing we wanted to use the IP number 192 168 0 1 we would have to send 1 Being attached to the GPRS network is not the same as having completed the GPRS session start up 131 G 5 1 GETTING STARTED gt SXADP0000192 168 0 1 2145 lt This last option with the deprecated message would have been gt SDP000019216800000102145 lt Having set the DP the unit will automatically start opening a TCP connec tion with the server as long as GPRS is ready even if it has no messages to send to it This is a programmed feature of the unit that makes it re open the TCP connection whenever the network is available after being down or whenever the connection gets closed At this point is possible for the On line led to start blinking mea
233. ning that count when told to do so Use the I command As with any TAIP command counters manipulation configuration can be included on an event s action so counters can be used to start timers or distance counts on an automatic basis when a defined situation occurs An example of such configuration can be found on the Scenarios and Examples sections With the same method counters can be used to count the number of occurrences of an event For more examples and information on counters see the GC command on the CY 115 y Q 4 13 MANIPULATING SIGNALS Unit s TAIP reference chapter and the Scenarios and Examples sections 4 13 Manipulating signals 4 14 User signals Signals marked with a sign on the signals list on the Event Machine section can be directly manipulated by the user These signals are e Outputs 4 e User Signals 10 Signals manipulation and consulting is achieved with the SS TAIP message When setting resetting an output with the SS message a direct hardware activation deactivation takes place on the selected output See the Outputs section on the Configuration chapter for more information User signals U are used to create complex configurations User signals are set or reset only with the SS message Thus they are used to trigger events based on a user set reset SS command or on a set reset SS event user action Refer to the Scenarios and Examples section for more information T
234. ning that for whatever reason the TCP con nection with any of the configured IP type DP is not open If after configuring the DP the On line LED remains solid the unit has established the TCP connection with the server and it is ready to send or receive messages to from it If on the contrary the LED starts blinking some considerations have to be taken 1 The AVL software server is not running or it is running but it is not listening for TCP connections 2 The listening port and or address is wrong 3 The server is behind a firewall router NAT that prevents the incom ing connection from passing to the TCP listener 4 The server is accepting the connection but it is immediately or a few seconds later closing it 5 The Antares SB is behind a cellular carrier s NAT which has the selected port blocked 6 The selected APN has no Internet access Or in case of a private network the APN has no access to the network where the AVL server is running 7 There are network related problems that prevent the unit from com municating even with GPRS up 5 1 4 Creating a Destination Address DA As mentioned on the Destinations section a DA has to be created so that an event s routing option can be completed In our example we only have to create a DA with a single Destination Point which is the one we just created We have no restrictions for the DA range 0 9 so we chose DA 4 for no special reason gt 5DA4 P00 lt Indica
235. nly works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 The list only accepts up to 16 Drives Status but the ID can be any num ber within the range The list is sorted in ascending order 1 20 Driver Sta BBB Varies Driver Status that will be displayed on the tus Garmin device For example to add a new Driver Status on the Garmin device s list use this message gt SXAGMKSA0000000000Resting on Lunch lt Antares SB will reponse like this to confirm that the Driver Status was added DoT 232 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE gt RXAGMKSAO0000000000rResting on Lunch ID Test lt 6 42 4 XAGMKSD Garmin Mode Delete Driver Status Qualifiers S R To delete a Driver Status on the Garmin device use the KSD modifier This message only works for Garmin devices that support Application Protocol A604 This message uses the following format AAAAAAAAAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning 10 Driver Sta AAAAAAAAAA 1 16 This is the ID used to identify each Driver tus ID Status on the list For example to delete a Driver Status from the Garmin device s list use this message gt SXAGMKSD0000000001 lt Antares SB will reponse like this to confirm that the Driver Status was deleted gt RXAGMKSD0000000001 ID Test lt It is possible to delete all the Driver Status with a single message please refer to the TAIP message XAGMX
236. nsult the Garmin device user manual The communication between Antares SB and Garmin is done via a cable with a RS 232 connector and a connector for the Garmin device which varies according to the Garmin device model The Garmin device is powered with 12V The cable used for the connection between Antares SB and the Garmin device has a vehicle lighter connector to power the Garmin device Some of the Garmin devices that have the Fleet Management Protocol and their respective communications cable reference can be found here http www8 garmin com solutions commercial supportedproducts jsp http www8 garmin com solutions pnd supportedproducts jsp These are just some of the devices For more information about devices that support the Fleet Management Protocol please contact Garmin directly DCT 73 A O 3 18 GARMIN DEVICES SUPPPORT nuvi 205 nuvi 205W Part Number 010 11232 00 Data Cable Pin Out 5 s Brown Serial Port GND EE ol 3 White Rx Serial to GPS 2 1 Yellow Tx Serial from GPS E ee DB 9 Female Reference 3 18 2 Data Flow Example This is an example of the flow of the data between Garmin Antares and the server listening for incoming messages from the Garmin device To send a text message to the Garmin device from the server use the fol lowing TAIP message na 74 G 3 18 GARMIN DEVICES SUPPPORT gt SXAGMTS0000001244751579Hello World lt
237. nt large areas circular regions are use ful for setting check points for route control on time arrival control and geo fence alarms to restrict a vehicle s movement Circular regions are set with the XAGR message The triggering signals are the Kxx signals where xx is the region s index For example to set a Circular Region centered at Lat 25 782066 Long 80 281380 having a radius of 200 meters send to the unit gt SXAGR551 257820 0802813000200000000 lt Now to generate event 05 whenever the unit enters the region gt SEDOS5XVO K55 lt See the XAGR message for more information Creating a region centered in the actual vehicle s position is also supported The XAIR message allows to set Circular Region centered on the actual po sition with the given radius For example to instruct the unit to create the Circular Region 44 cen tered here having a radius of 500 meters send to the unit 14 Create a shut engine off condition that only acts when vehicle is at rest DCT 108 i Q 4 8 USING REGION ID REPORTS gt SXAIR44000500 lt Note that any region previously defined on the index 44 will be overwritten Now to generate event 30 when the vehicle leaves this region send to the unit gt SED3OXVO K44 lt To undefine the region use gt SXAGR44U lt For more information see the XAGR and XAIR messages 4 8 Using Region ID Reports Use the Region ID report to define a single event fo
238. number identification service is not provided by the network operator the autho rization process can not take place and the incoming call is rejected The unit rejects a call by hanging up immediately after answering Number identification service has to be enabled for the unit s line by the carrier in order for the unit to answer phone calls To determine the incoming voice call authorization on a given Destination the C field on the Phone Number type DP message is used Refer to the XADP message for more information To monitor the state of a voice call use the voice signals e V00 Any voice call is taking place e VO1 A voice call with DP 10 is taking place e V02 A voice call with DP 11 is taking place e VO3 A voice call with DP 12 is taking place e V04 A voice call with DP 13 is taking place e VO5 A voice call with DP 14 is taking place 4 19 Battery monitoring To monitor the internal back up battery refer to the XABS message To generate events according to charge level changes use the battery sig nals Bxx and their definition with the XAGB message 15 Depending on Hardware configuration this value does not lead necessarily to 60 seconds but to some value between 50 and 60 seconds the GPS Back Log data must be analyzed to determinate this DCT 120 e Ul 4 20 SERIAL PORT DEVICES 4 20 Serial port devices Note Depending on the type of data that it is going to be ex
239. o retrieve the last 10 messages stored on the GPS back log use gt QXAKLOO10 lt The unit will respond something like gt RXAKLOOOO gt RXAKLOOO1 gt RXAKLOOO2 gt RXAKLOOO3 gt RXAKLOOO4 gt RXAKLOOOS gt RXAKLOOO6 gt RXAKLOOO7 gt RXAKLOOO8 gt RXAKLOOO9 gt RXAKLOO10 lt RPV32129 2236273 0840549303521512 lt RPV32130 2236262 0840550103521412 lt RTM0855177932507200814109100000 lt RPV32132 2236262 0840550103321412 lt RAL32133 02582 02512 lt RPV32134 2236217 0840553103021712 lt RPV32135 2236208 0840553902721912 lt RPV32136 2236200 0840554502421712 lt RPV32137 2236193 0840554901719412 lt RPV32138 2236189 0840555100721512 lt Where each GPS message is shown after the log s index The last message shows no GPS message indicating the total number of messages retrieved and confirming the user command QXAKLOO10 252 y O 6 54 XALL LOCAL LOCK 6 54 XALL Local Lock Qualifiers S Q R This message is used to lock unlock most configuration messages S messages and query messages Q messages on the TAIP console for the serial port A locking operation consists of using this message and a user defined 4 character code An unlocking operation is performed by entering the message in unlocking mode with the same code defined on the locking operation When locked any set or query message coming from the serial port is rejected with error code 30 with th
240. of Output 4 1 active 0 inactive 1 Out 3 B flag State of Output 3 1 Out 2 C flag State of Output 2 1 Out 1 D flag State of Output 1 1 Input 4 E flag State of Input 4 1 Input 3 F flag State of Input 3 1 Input 2 H flag State of Input 2 1 Input 1 J flag State of Input 1 1 Ignition K flag State of vehicle ignition 1 Power L flag State of main power source 1 12 24v M flag State of main power source 12 24voltage detector 247 a G 6 49 XAIP IP ADDRESS 6 49 XAIP IP address Qualifiers Q R This message is used to consult the actual IP address assigned to the unit by the carrier IP address 0 0 0 0 is returned when the GPRS session is not up The message has the following format AAABBBCCCDDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 3 1st number AAA 000 255 First number of the IP number 3 2nt number BBB 000 255 Second number of the IP number 3 3rd number CCC 000 255 Third number of the IP number 3 4th number DDD 000 255 Fourth number of the IP number 248 6 50 XAIR CREATE CIRCULAR REGION HERE 6 50 XAIR Create Circular Region here Qualifiers S R When this command is given to the unit a circular region centered at the actual position is created with the radius given See also the XAGR to create Circular Regions manually The message has the following format AABBBBBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning
241. of the reports when using the Orbcomm System satellite modem must be configured in both the satellite modem and Orbcomm s server by the user because Antares SB does not configure the destination points used by the satellite modem The satellite modem serial port must be configured to work at 9600bps Depending on the configuration script Antares SB can send the TAIP EV message exclusively to the satellite modem through the serial port when there is no communication between the AVL server or other IP destination points The TAIP EV message may contain the vehicle information such as Speed Acceleration Position Ignition state etc In this basic integration Antares SB will not monitor the state of the Orbcomm system Antares SB will send the message through the serial port to the modem and will wait for confirmation that the message was received by the modem before deleting it from its buffer Because of this it is important that the modem is correctly configured and has been tested to be working correctly by prior to connecting it to Antares SB The event definition must be done using the Message ID qualifier O from the ED TAIP message which will enable Antares SB to send an EV re porting message to the serial port using the SC Originated Default Message protocol from the Orbcomm Serial Interface Specification This message can be up to 116 bytes long The destination address of the message must include the serial port
242. oing to be reported even though the driver did the right thing To do so we create another silent event which undefines the COO counter whenever the speed falls below the limit gt SED415V0 S07 ACT SGCOOU lt This will guarantee that the counter won t activate signal COO if the speed falls below the limit before 15 seconds In order to lit LED connected to output 1 when the actual speed is greater than the speed limit we create a silent event that drives output 1 high when the speed goes beyond the limit b i 142 lO 5 6 6 Script 5 6 SPEED VIOLATION WITH WARNING REPORT gt SED42SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP11 lt In a similar way as it was done with the 15 seconds counter we have to create another silent event that turns the LED off when the speed limits falls below gt SED43SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP10 lt The resulting script Antares SB script Getting Started example SMS reporting SMS interaction Voice interaction Ignition sense Speed viol and warning Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Units ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIMs PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678 lt A Destination Address holding the server desti
243. onitoring oaoa a 120 Serial port devices o oo a a 121 Analog to Digital Converter monitoring 123 Using a TCP UDP keep alive 123 IMElas TD neccs airen di kuk o a ke a i 123 Cell ID reporting o a 124 Sleep mode oaaae 125 Restoring the unit a 125 Resetting the unit aa aaa 125 Using Scripts e ansia e es e 126 4 28 1 Creating an script from scratch 127 11 pg Contents 4 28 2 Reading Scripts o 127 4 28 3 Writing Scripts 128 4 28 4 Scripts Over The lT 128 5 Scenarios and examples 130 5 1 Getting Started 0 2008 130 5 1 1 Setting the unit s ID 130 5 1 2 Setting the APN and PIN 130 5 1 3 Creating a Destination Point DP 131 5 1 4 Creating a Destination Address DA 132 5 1 5 Creating a time period criterion 132 5 1 6 Tiding a signal to an event 133 5 1 7 Checking the host software server 133 5 1 8 Adding an Input report 134 SLI Script ggs kaad a a a we Ras a A 134 5 2 Adding SMS reporting 135 5 2 1 Create the SMS Destination Point 135 5 2 2 Create a new Destination Address 135 5 2 3 Change the Input report event definition 136 5 2 4 Create a SMS custom message 136 5 2 5 Check the reported message 136 D20 SCPE a eat ep Gok Se ee E
244. ons at the same time with a single definition Up to 10 0 to 9 DAs may be defined Refer to the DA message for more information This command enables the user to group a list of DPs and or a range of DPs The main use for DAs is on the routing options of an event definition The Event Machine section gives more information about this What should be clear on this is that a report generated by an event is always sent to a DA not to a single DP For this reason DAs make part of the minimum configuration required by the unit Some examples of DAs definitions are 1 Defining DA 5 as the group containing DPs 04 06 10 and 15 gt SDA5 P04 P06 P10 P15 lt This will make any event using DA 5 as Destination Address on its routing options to send the same report to the IP host 04 IP host 06 phone number 10 and the unit s serial port Such an event could be defined as gt SED23NV5 TD1 lt 2 Defining DA 8 as the group containing DPs 00 to 03 07 to 09 and 14 gt SDA8 P00 P03 P07 P09 P14 lt 3 To delete a DA definition gt SDA8U lt Make sure of using the eXtended version of the DP message when working with names T The unit can be set to listen for UDP queries on an UDP server manner See the XAUP and XAUN messages 94 y O 4 4 Reporting Note Note 4 4 REPORTING You can always define a DA containing a single DP so you can send a single report to a single destination For example gt SDA3 P
245. ost all of the reports triggered when the vehicle is not moving are not relevant The counter can also be configured to follow a time only criteria To do so set the Distance Threshold parameter to 0 and the unit will only use the Minimum Report Time as trigger How does this criteria works First the signal has to be triggered by a distance threshold that tells the activate its associated TD signal whenever the accumulated distance exceeds this value This distance only scheme has two problems 1 What if the vehicle goes too fast and or the distance threshold is low It will set the signal too frequent 2 What if the vehicle moves too slow and or the distance threshold is large Or worse what if it does not move at all It will activate the signal very few times or may never activate it To solve this problem the distance only trigger is improved with a Time and Distance trigger that adds two controlling parameters for the Distance threshold These parameters are the Minimum Time and the Maximum Time The Maximum Time takes control of the signal when the unit has not exceeded the Distance Threshold for a long time So this value ensures a minimum triggering frecuency One way to see this parameter is that this time will be the signal activation period when the vehicle is stationary The Minimum Time takes control of the signal when the unit exceeds the Distance threshold Assuring that even when the unit is exceedin
246. oth true at the same time C is going to be true too Whenever S or P become false C will become false The situation we just created named C is useful for detecting an speed limit violation within a cities perimeter With C we specify that we are interesting not only on detecting a general speed violation but an specific speed limit for an specific city boundary Note that a cities perimeter is just an example We could have specified a road or a small neighborhood You can create simple triggers which go off whenever a single specific situa tion occurs like when a vehicle s emergency button wired to a unit s input is activated Or you can construct more complex triggers by combining situations with the logical operators named above like it was done on the previous example Having this is mind different triggers may be created to accomplish tasks like e Sense a panic button to send the current vehicle s position to different destinations including the vehicle s owner cellular phone through a SMS Have the unit make a voice call is also possible This will make the cabin s audio available to a predefined phone number whenever the driver presses the alarm button 97 zz G 4 5 2 Actions 4 5 EVENT MACHINE Speed limit monitoring which includes a time condition seconds and a visual advisory using an output that gives the driver a chance to slow down before the actual speed violation is reported G
247. ottle thresholds See the XAOT mes sage OFO OF4 Fuel Level percentage True when the remaining fuel in the vehicle drops below the corresponding fuel thresholds Percentage See the XAOF message OGO OG4 Fuel Gallons thresholds True when the remaining fuel in the vehicle drops below the corresponding fuel thresholds Gallons See the XADG message ORO OR4 Fuel Rate thresholds True when the fuel consumption is higher than the corre sponding fuel rate thresholds Gallons per hour See the XAOR message OSO Status Communicating with Vehicle True when the OBD is communicating with Antares See the XAOS message OS1 Status Communication Checksum error True when an OBD communication checksum error has oc curred See the XAOS message OS2 OBD Vehicle Ignition State True when the OBD detects that the vehicle ignition is on See the XAOS message OS3 Vehicle Malfunction Indicator Light True when the OBD detects that the Vehicle Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Check Engine Indicator is on See the XAOS message OS4 Secondary OBD tool connected True if there is a secondary OBD is tool connected See the XAOS message ROO R29 Regions True when the vehicle is inside the corresponding region See the GR message RST Software reset This signal is used do detect a firmware reset It is set to true every time there is a software reset and
248. over voltage protection among others The unit has 4 discrete outputs located on the I O molex type con nector The outputs are Open Drain type with no internal pull up resistor Meaning that the user has to provide a pull up resistor to any positive voltage 30V max to detect an inactive output by voltage Each output can drive a continuous current of 2A The electrical conditions are Logical State Electrical state Active OV Inactive Open or the pull up voltage max 30V If the output is used for cutting restoring GND a direct connection can be used For example when driving a LED 44 G 2 4 OUTPUTS V ANTARES GPS If the output is used for cutting restoring a positive voltage on a high current device like for example the vehicle s ignition wire an external device like a relay o high current transistor has to be used See the Connection diagrams for an illustration 45 lO 2 5 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 2 5 Connection diagrams The following illustrations show e Panic Button detection e Ignition sense e Engine turn off Shutting and engine off without knowing a vehicle s state is not advised See the Operation chapter for more information 46 Pu G 2 5 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 47 i 3 Operation Note The Antares SB operates on an automatic basis according to an user defined configuration which can be modified at any time lo
249. port gt SDA5 P02 P03 P10 P15 lt e To create Destination Address 0 with only one Destination Point for example the unit s serial port gt SDAO P15 lt e To create a Destination Address as a range of DPs gt SDAO P00 P05 P10 P12 P13 P15 lt 167 z O 6 4 DP DESTINATION POINT 6 4 DP Destination Point Qualifiers Q S R This command is deprecated and should not be used use the XADP message instead A Destination Point defines the IP address and or cellular telephone of a destination An association of Destination Points is used to define a Des tination Address which is used in an Event Definition to route Event Mes sages The Destination Points also serve security purposes as the Antares SB will only respond to queries originated from these addresses There are 16 Destination Points distributed on 10 IP addresses port 5 Telephones and the unit s Serial Port The message has the following format for destination points 00 to 09 AABCDDDEEEFFFGGGHHHHH Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Destination AA 00 09 Decimal number holding the point s index In Point ID dexes 00 to 09 refer to IP addresses where an AVL software is listening for TAIP messages In dexes 10 to 14 refer to SMS receptor telephones for these indexes do not use this table use the next one 1 Console ac B flag TAIP console access flag cess 1 The IP type host has no TAIP consol
250. quotes and in uppercase This message has to be sent in a single packet over the serial port This means that writing EXIT_COMMDATA on Hyperterminal by hand won t serve as an escape message To send the message as a single packet write EXIT_COMMDATA on any text editor select and copy the text then go to Hyperteminal and after checking the correct port baud rate 9600 and connecting to the COM port select Edit Paste to Host If the escape sequence is received correctly Antares SB will respond with the message EXIT_OK Then TAIP commands can be exchanged with the unit Once enabled the byte mode will be retained on resets and power cycles Antares SB will send a TAIP EV messages to the Orbcomm system satel lite modem through it s serial port using a serial cross over cable Only the Tx Rx and GND lines are needed for communication Antares SB encapsulates a TAIP EV message for the satellite modem using the SC Originated Default Message defined on Orbcomm s Serial Interface Specification when an event that has been defined with the Message ID qualifier O is triggered More information about the SC Originated Default Message from Orb comm s Serial Interface Specification can be requested directly to Orbcomm at Service customer orbcomm com However this information is not re quired to set up Antares SB to work with the satellite modem If the Event Handling field is set as X the encapsulated message will only
251. r The XAMD TAIP message is used to consult the MD5 checksum value of any string Please refer to these TAIP messages for more information on the Authentication Mechanism DCT 71 G 3 16 SMS Alias 3 16 SMS ALIAS Antares SB allows to configure up to ten SMS Alias A SMS Alias allows to associate a regular text message with a TAIP message When Antares SB receives the associated text message via SMS it will execute the TAIP message For information on how to configure the SMS Alias refer to the XATA TAIP message 3 17 SMS Messages Gateway The SMS Messages Gateway allows Antares SB to send any text message up to 80 characters long through a TAIP message Please refer to the XASG TAIP message for more information on the SMS Messages gateway mechanism 3 18 Garmin Devices Suppport The Garmin devices can be used as communication tools between the driver and the AVL server The Garmin device allows an Antares SB user to send and receive text messages from or to a server It also allows to receive Stop Messages fr om the server that can help create routes for the vehicle to follow Antares SB can work with any Garmin device that have the Fleet Management Protocol implemented The user will be able Lo send and receive text messages to and from an AVL server Antares SB will also send unsolicited status messages each time an action read delete etc is performed on the text messages stored in Garmin s Inbo
252. r more information on this For example to update to firmware version 5 22 gt SXAFU005225V15 lt Notice that diagnostic messages will be sent to the serial port DP 15 If diagnostic messages have to be sent to Destination Address 5 use gt SXAFU00522SVA5 lt See the Firmware Upgrade section on the Operation chapter for more information 225 A O 6 38 XAGA ADC LEVELS 6 38 XAGA ADC levels Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure analog to digital converter levels associated to D signals The message has the following format AABCCCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 ADC level AA 00 04 Identification code assigned to the ID ADC level 1 Active flag B flag V ADC level defined as a voltage value ADC range is 0 32V P ADC level defined as a percentage value U Delete the ADC level 5 ADC level CCCCC A millivolts value or percentage value See the Analog to Digital Converter section on the Operation chapter for examples 226 A O 6 39 XAGB BACK UP BATTERY LEVELS 6 39 XAGB Back up Battery levels Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to configure back up battery levels associated to B signals The message has the following format AABCCCCC Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Battery AA 00 04 Identification code assigned to the level ID Battery level 1 Active flag B flag
253. r previous example We defined the Phone Number type DP 10 as gt SXADP1010912345678 lt Refer to the XADP message for more information The underlined value indicates the access parameter for this DP indicating that the Phone Num ber 912345678 has TAIP console access via SMS messages Now that we are clear on the access level of the Phone Number type DP interacting with the unit is a matter of sending TAIP commands through SMS messages and waiting for response as incoming SMS texts 5 3 1 Query the unit with a SMS To ask for the current position velocity solution of the unit sent a from the Phone Number 912345678 an SMS with the query gt QPV lt The unit will respond with an SMS containing the text gt RPV00123 0000000 0000000000112012 lt 5 3 2 Set an output with a SMS Driving outputs is achieved by using the Set form of the SS message To set output 2 high via a SMS message send to the unit from the authorized DCT 138 zi G 5 4 ADDING VOICE INTERACTION phone number 912345678 the text message gt SSSXP21 lt The unit responds the following via SMS gt RSSXP21 lt Confirming that it accepted the command and the output has been set high 5 4 Adding voice interaction The unit may receive or make calls from to any of the Phone Number type defined Destinations To initiate a voice call to a DP the XAVC message is used To receive voice calls the remote Phone Number has to be defined on a Phone Number
254. r several circular and polygonal regions A report will be sent using only one event code when the associated regions signals transition The Region ID reports are configured using the XARE TAIP message This TAIP message will generate a report every time the unit enters a region and or the unit leaves a region The generated report will include In Out indicator the type of region and the region index For example to define the Region ID report using the event code 00 that will report both when the unit goes In or Out from a region use the following configuration message gt SXAREBOONVO lt A report generated when the unit entered the circular region 10 would be gt REV001524377378 0475230 0740249100000012 RE 1K10 ID test lt A report generated when the unit left the polygonal region 20 would be gt REV001524377378 0475230 0740249100000012 RE 0R20 ID test lt For more information on the Region ID reports refer to the XARE TAIP message 4 9 Setting Speed Limits Example Speed limits are created with the GS TAIP message When creating an speed limit we are telling the unit to activate the corresponding speed signal Sxx whenever the vehicle s speed is greater than the defined limit and to get set the signal low whenever the vehicle s speed is below the limit Up to 10 speed limits may be defined so there are 10 speed signals S00 S09 available to be used on an event s definition To create the speed limit 00 havi
255. rce K flag Position fix mode 0 2D GPS 1 3D GPS 2 2D DGPS 3 3D DGPS 6 DR 8 Degraded DR 9 Unknown 1 Age of L flag Age of data used for the report data 0 Not available 1 Old 10 seconds 2 Fresh lt 10 seconds Extended xxx xxx Information Tags EV Tags See the following table 176 6 8 EV EVENT MESSAGE Tag Meaning AL AAAAA Altitude is A meters Above Mean Sea Level AMSL AC AAA Acceleration is A Miles per Hour per second AD AAAAA Voltage on the Analog port is A mV BL AAAAA Voltage of the back up battery is A mV CE AAAABB Simple Cell ID information See the XACE message for information on each item A Cell ID in hex B RxLvl CF AAABBBCCCCDDDDEE Full Cell ID information See the XACE message for infor mation on each item A MCC Mobile Country Code B MNC Mobile Network Code C LAC hex Local Area Code D Cell ID hex E RxLvl CVAA BBBBB The value of counter A is B IO ABC Inputs and Outputs state Bitwise representation of A bitO Ignition 1 ACTIVE 0 INACTIVE bit1 Main Power Source 1 ExT PWR 0 BACKUP BATTERY bit2 12 24V detector 1 EXT PwR AT 24V 0 EXT PWR AT 12V Bitwise representation of B outputs bitO Output 1 1 ACTIVE 0 INACTIVE bitl Output 2 bit2 Output 3 bit3 Output 4 Bitwise representation of C inputs
256. refer to the ED message 4 5 4 Signals As described in the previous section the event machine takes actions like reporting or switching outputs whenever a user defined trigger goes off This trigger is configured by the user with the logical combination of situations DCT 102 y Note 4 5 EVENT MACHINE A situations makes reference to a vehicle stato which is in fact represented by signals and their state Antares SB signals are of boolean nature meaning that they can only take one of two possible values true or false Signals and the logical operators AND OR NOT are used to create logical equations to form events triggers By using the SS TAIP message a signal s state can be consulted and de pending on the signal s type this command can be used also to change the signal s state Signals names always have three characters The available signals for the Antares SB are presented in the next ta ble 103 i O 4 5 EVENT MACHINE ID Signal Description A00 A09 Destination Points state True when the IP address port defined on the corresponding Destination Point s index is accepting a TCP connection or when using UDP i e the TCP UDP socket is open See the XADP message B00 B04 Battery Levels True when the unit s back up battery level is above the value defined with the XAGB message C00
257. region e Enable a vehicle s ignition when the working hour begins e Set Reset user signals to trigger other events This allows the creation of complex event s scenarios e Sense the vehicle s ignition to have the unit start working on a low power consumption mode whenever the vehicle is off User actions pre set TAIP commands can also be used to generate reports This is because the response to a TAIP command s that is defined on an event s user action field is are sent to the event s Destination Address for non silent events So any information that is not included in the report ing messages ET EV and extended EV that can be consulted with a TAIP query can be reported by creating an event that has the TAIP query or queries on the user action field For example the following configuration gt SGCOOTRO0300 lt gt SEDOONVO CO0 ACT QRP ACT QGCO6V lt will make the unit report the GSM network state gt QRP lt and the value of the counter 06 gt QGCO6V lt every 5 minutes to Destination Address 0 The user actions can also be silent meaning that unlike the previous ex ample the actions will not generate a report This silent actions allow to 13 The user configuration should include a low speed precondition Turning an engine off without knowing a vehicle s state is not advised DCT 100 y Q 4 5 3 Events Report action 4 5 EVENT MACHINE perform actions that do not need to be r
258. ries International Mobile Subscriber Identity 273 yq 6 72 6 72 XATA SMS ALIAS XATA SMS Alias Qualifiers S Q R The SMS Alias were created to associate a up to ten character long text message to a regular TAIP message When an Alias is received through a SMS message the associated command to this Alias is executed by Antares SB The message has the following format AAB CCC DDD Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Index AA 00 09 Store amp SMS Alias index 1 Action B flag 1 Define the SMS Alias U Undefine the SMS Alias 80 TAIP Mes CCC string TAIP message to be executed To in max sage clude a character in a TAIP mes sage use the 3B character 1 10 Alias DDD string Text message associated with the TAIP message to be executed For example to create a SMS Alias that will set the Output 1 of Antares SB to true use this message gt SXATAO01 SSSXP11 VehicleOFF lt For this example Output 1 is connected to a Engine Turn OFF Circuit that will turn the vehicle off when the Output 1 is set to true that is why the text message VehicleOFF was used 4 Shutting an engine off without considering a vehicle s state is not advised b 274 6 73 XATD Current Destination Point 6 73 XATD CURRENT DESTINATION POINT Qualifiers Q R Use this message to know the DP index used on the
259. riodic window 184 A O 6 13 GR Regions 6 13 GR REGIONS Qualifiers Q S R Use this message to create edit polygon defined regions Managing a region is different than managing any other configuration parameter this because a region can t be defined only with one GR message instead several messages are used to create a region one for every point the region has So when you use a GR message you are creating or editing only a region s point The Active Flag of the message is used to set the last point of a region To undefine a region simply set the Active Flag of the first or second point 1 to U The message has the following format AABBCDDDEEEEEFFFFGGGGGHHII Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Region in 0 29 Region index of the point that is being con dex figured 2 Point in 00 49 Point index dex 1 Last point flag Use flag 1 The actual point is not the last point of the region U The actual point is the last point of the region Use this flag on points 00 or 01 to undefine a region 8 Point s DDD EEEEE degrees WGS 84 point s latitude It does include latitude sign Positive for north 9 Point s FFFF GGGGG degrees WGS 84 point s longitude It does include longitude sign Positive for east 2 Point s HH 00 49 99 Index of the first left neighbor of the ac left neigh tual point Use 99 to leave this field empty bor 1 Check the explanation after this table 2 Point s
260. rmin Mode Stop Message Qualifiers Q S R To send a Stop Message from the server to the Garmin device and to consult the status of a Stop Message use the S modifier The Stop Messages are used to inform the Garmin device of a new destination When the Garmin device receives a Stop from the server it displays a floating icon indicating that a Stop Message has arrived By touching this icon the Stops List will be shown and the option to start navigating to the new destination will be available The coordinates that represent the Stop destination are given in semicircles This message will only work for Garmin devices that support the Application Protocol A603 The following formulas show how to convert between degrees and semicircles degrees semicircles 180 2 semicircles degrees 231 180 If the result of this operation is a number with less than 10 digits it must be preceded with as many 0 as needed to complete the 10 digits For example Latitude 25 7827 11930464 7 307599592 Sa This number should be typed in for Antares B like this 0307599592 DoT 235 Y 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE Longitude 0 1197 11930464 7 1428076 This number should be typed in for Antares SB like this 0001428076 When using the S qualifier to send a Stop Message use the following format AAABBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCDDDDDDDDDDDE EEE Chars Item Format Value Meaning Stop ID
261. s h s 3 Max Speed EEE 0 999 Max registered speed in MPH 5 Engine s RPM FFFFF 0 16384 Max registered Engine s RPM 3 Throttle Posi GGG 0 100 Max registered Throttle Position Percentage tion 3 Fuel Rate HHH 0 Max registered Fuel Rate Gallons per hour ALCIIIL II EVJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Action Response A 0 5 C Action Response type C Clear Clear maximums and their GPS data 0 Max Positive Acc Query Response to max positive acc OBD GPS 1 Max Negative Acc Query Response to max positive acc OBD GPS 2 Max Speed Query Response to max reg istered speed OBD GPS 3 Max Engine s RPM 4 Max Throttle Position 5 Max Fuel Rate 3 5 Metric 11 H varies Value of the requested metric 37 EV message JJJ GPS information corresponding to the requested metric in EV form See the EV message for details See the Configuration chapter for examples 250 6 52 XAKA KEEP ALIVE 6 52 XAKA Keep Alive Qualifiers S Q R This message is used to activate deactivate a keep alive to a given IP type Des tination Point see the XADP message A keep alive option should be avoided as increases the transmission cost Use this option if you need to be able of interro gating the unit at any time and the unit is working behind a NAT The keep alive transmission will prevent the NAT from breaking the connection betw
262. second neighbor parameter must be 99 Left Neighbor 1 00 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 02 has points 00 and 01 to its left but only point 01 is connected to it so this its only left neighbor Left Neighbor 1 01 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 03 Left Neighbor 1 00 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 04 Left Neighbor 1 03 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 05 Left Neighbor 1 04 Left Neighbor 2 99 e Point 06 has two left neighbors Left Neighbor 1 02 Left Neighbor 2 05 Example Region B This a region where two connected points share the same longitude 187 y O Left neighbors 6 13 GR REGIONS As you can see points 02 and 03 share the same longitude As discussed early it is not relevant which point comes first the points could be assigned having the 03 below the 02 instead of the arrangement presented in the figure The relevant issue is that these two points are connected and you must be careful of counting only one connection Lets take a look to the left neighbors to clarify this Point 00 has no points on the left so it has no left neighbors Left Neighbor 1 99 Left Neighbor 2 99 Point 01 Left Neighbor 1 00 Left Neighbor 2 99 Point 02 has point 01 as left neighbor Now we can decide to add point 03 as the second left neighbor but we must be careful of not counting 02 as left neighbor of point 03 Left Neighbor 1 01 Left Neighbor 2 03 Point 03
263. set If it lasts longer you may have a hardware problem or a defective SIM card As long as the Power LED is solid ON this LED indicates the GSM registration status in the following way e Solid The unit is Not Registered on the GSM network e Blinking The unit is Registered on the GSM network e Off The unit is Registered with a very poor signal When the unit is GSM registered the Signal LED is either blinking or completely off By counting the number of blinks before a pause the user can have an estimate of the Received Signal Strength See the table below 3 It may be also OFF when in an special technical support mode DCT 50 G 3 2 LEDS Blinks RSSI RSS dBm 0 off 0 to 7 113 99 Very poor 1 8 to 13 97 87 Poor 2 14 to 17 85 79 Fair 3 18 to 20 77 73 Fair 4 21 to 24 71 65 Good 5 no pause 25 to 31 63 51 Excellent 3 2 3 Fix Yellow As long as the Power LED is solid ON this LED gives information on the GPS receiver status There are two possible states e ON The GPS unit is doing fixes This indicates a well placed GPS antenna with sky view OFF The GPS antenna is connected but the unit is not doing fixes This could happen even if the antenna is well placed but if this is the case the situation should not be permanent In this situation the GPS messages transmitted by the unit may be of lower GPS quality Check the GPS antenna location and or typ
264. specified so any input particularly the power detector will drive the unit back to normal mode 2 Create an event triggered when the power signal goes high that deactivates the power saving mode gt SEDO1SVO F13 ACT SXAPME lt Having this configuration the unit will go to sleep mode 2 minutes after disconnecting the primary power source 266 A O 6 65 XAPW SET PASSWORD 6 65 XAPW Set Password Qualifiers Q S R Use this message to configure a password for the Authentication Mechanism The message has the following format ABBBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Active flag A flag 0 No password has been set 1 A password is set The actual password can not be consulted 4 40 Password BBBB varies Password to be used by the authenti cation mechanism For example to set a password use the following configuration gt SXAPWpassword lt To consult if a password is set use the following message gt QXAPW lt Antares SB will respond like this gt RXAPW1 lt Indicating that a password is set but it will never show the actual password Please refer to the Authentication Mechanism section of the Operation chapter for more information 267 z 6 66 XARD Reset diagnostics Qualifiers S Q R 6 66 XARD RESET DIAGNOSTICS This messages activates deactivates the system s resets information displayed with TX messages to
265. ssumed that the DAO contains a valid IP type Destination Point A regular TAIP message will be sent to any Destination Point that is not an IP type Destination Point if they are included in the DA If DAO does not contain a Destination Point with a valid IP type desti nation or contains other type of Destination Point as well as the IP type Destination Point the message will be send as regular TAIP messages Refer to the Scenarios and examples chapter for more information 173 zz 6 6 ER ERROR REPORT 6 6 ER Error Report Qualifiers R This message is generated by the unit whenever the previous command en tered on the TAIP console generates an error The message has the following format AA BBB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Error AA Error code See the table of error Code codes at the end of this chapter varies TAIP BBB TAIP message that generated the message error lt does no include the mes sage s gt and lt characters 6 6 1 Example Entering the following command will make the unit generate error 86 gt SGFO0 lt The unit returns gt RER86 SGFOO lt That according to the error list Can not change a GPIOs mask GF on this product Only the FO value is accepted See the GF message 174 A O 6 7 ET EVENT REPORT TIME ONLY MESSAGE 6 7 ET Event Report time only message Qualifiers R This message is
266. t Refer to the Desti nations section on the Configuration chapter The following are the general requirements for an AVL server working with units on UDP 1 The AVL server has to be able to listen UDP datagrams on a given port The port number has to be the same port number used on the unit s IP type Destination and it has to be clear of any Firewall NAT and or router restriction The server should not use a keep alive mechanism Using a periodical report event generated by the unit is preferred The server should have an association between the unit s ID and the information from the last inbound UDP message received from the unit This information is the last incoming message s IP and Port origins so the AVL server can route any user query using that IP and Port as destinations An UDP destination s configuration flag can be set so the unit waits for an UDP confirmation message from the AVL server every time an event report message is sent This UDP wait for ack option can be turned OFF but it is not advised as UDP will not assure the delivery of reports by itself If wait for ack option is used the AVL server has to implement this acknowl edging mechanism Otherwise and because it does not receives a confirmation message the unit will keep on sending the same reporting message for ever For more information continue with the next paragraph DCT 66 e G UDP confirmation message Example 3 10 RE
267. t i e 00 15 0 F When using the Q qualifier to query the state of the Garmin mode this field will show the Destination Point set or U if the Garmin mode is dis abled The option to disable the Garmin Mode using this TAIP message is only available over the air To disable the Garmin Mode locally send the string EXIT_COMMDATA as a single packet throught the serial port For example To enable the Garmin mode send to Antares gt SXAGMEO lt Antares will respond with gt RXAGMEO lt Once the Garmin Mode is active Antares SB will send any message typed on the Garmin device to the server using the TX TAIP message For more information on the format used by Antares SB to send the messages to the server consult the TX message The XAGM TAIP message Garmin Mode uses several modifiers for each function implemented Each modifier will be explained below CY 230 Y 6 42 1 6 42 2 Note 6 42 XAGM GARMIN MODE When Garmin sends a message to the server which uses the time field the value will reflect the same time set on the Garmin device However when sending messages from the server the Garmin device will handle any time value received as GMT 0 Because of this the time value used in the messages sent to Garmin must be calculated using the local GMT offset XAGMI Consult Garmin Device General Information Qualifiers Q R To consult th
268. t can be configured to automatically take outputs actions depending on different situations The Event Machine s signals asso ciated to outputs are Output Signal name Old signal name Output 1 XP1 G04 Output 2 XP2 G05 Output 3 XP3 GO6 Output 4 XP4 GO7 Outputs activation and deactivation is controlled by the SS TAIP message To activate output 3 send to the unit gt SSSXP31 lt To query its status gt QSSXP3 lt and the unit should return gt RSSXP31 lt To deactivate the output 4 The maximum supported voltage for inputs is 32 volts DCT 53 M G Example 3 5 ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER gt SSSXP30 lt Making the Antares SB automatically drive an output Use the SS message as an user action on an event definition see the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter and the ED mes sage on the TAIP reference gt SED20NVO RO5 ACT SSSXP21 lt This will make the unit automatically set the Output 2 high when it leaves region RO5 See the GR message on the TAIP reference for information on how to create regions 3 5 Analog to Digital Converter Example The Antares SB has one ADC whose input voltage is located on the I O molex type connector The input voltage range is OV to 32V The ADC value computed by the unit is an average value of samples taken at a 10 seconds pe riod so you will not correctly get a voltage pulse that last a shorter time
269. t is generated when a signal or an equation becomes true Con DCT 96 y O Example 4 5 EVENT MACHINE sequently a minus sign indicates that the report is generated when the signal or the equation becomes false When A or B becomes true gt AB When A and B and C becomes false gt AB amp C amp If the report must be generated when one signal becomes true and another becomes false one of the signals must be negated using the boolean opera tor not Either the plus or minus sign can be used but for it is easier to understand the equation when the plus sign is used When A becomes true and B becomes false A B amp Combining situations with operators A vehicle going at or over 60mph is a situation let s call it situation S This situation may be true or may be false there are no other possibilities These kind of situations that can only take two possible values true or false are said to be of boolean nature Let s add another boolean situation A vehicle located within some cities perimeter This again is a two value only situation Let s call it P How can we combine these two situations to create a third complex situation We can do so with logical operators For example let s create a third situation C that is only true when the other two situations are also true For this we use the AND operator in the following form C S AND P Now every time S and P are b
270. te AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt The Phone Number type destination with support for user messages ON gt SXADP1010912345678 lt A Destination Address holding the server destination gt SDA4 POO lt A Destination Address holding the server destination and phone number gt SDA5 POO P10 lt Time only Time And Distance signal definition gt STD80300 lt 150 5 8 SAFE ENGINE TURN OFF Event triggered by T amp D signal gt SED37NV4 TD8 lt Input sense Input report event gt SEDOSNV5 IP3 lt User text message for event 05 gt SXATMO5Input 3 has been activated lt Ignition Sense 2 5 35 Ignition ON event gt SED19NV4 FOO lt Ignition OFF event gt SED20NV4 FOO lt Speed viol warning Set an speed limit of 65mph gt 5G50710650 lt Start a 15 secs timer when speed limit is violated silent event gt SED40SVO S07 ACT SGCOOTCO0015 lt Stop the timer when the speed falls below the limit silent event gt SED415V0 S07 ACT SGCOOUK lt Create the violation report gt SED1ONV4 COO lt Drive a LED on output 1 ON when the speed goes beyond the limit silent event gt SED428V0 507 ACT SSSXP11 lt Drive a LED on output 1 OFF when the speed falls off the limit silent event gt SED43SV0 S07 ACT SSSXP10 lt 151 5 8 7 Operation 5 8 SAFE ENGINE T
271. ted VOICE call reception allowed 4 TAIP console via SMS allowed VOICE call reception restricted 5 Full restriction varies Phone num DDD Phone Phone number of the SMS receptor A maxi ber mum of 20 digits is allowed Note The Serial Port is referenced as the Destination Point with index 15 169 Y 6 5 ED EVENT DEFINITION 6 5 ED Event Definition Qualifiers Q S R This message is used to define events These events define the Event Ma chine configuration for the Antares SB An event is created by defining a boolean combination of signals as a trigger a routing indication for a gener ated event message EV or ET and a possible TATP message to be executed when the event occurs For more information refer to the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter The message has the following format 170 Y 6 5 ED EVENT DEFINITION AABCD EEE EEE F G ACT HH ACT HH Chars Item Format Value Meaning 2 Event ID AA 00 49 Decimal number ranging between 00 to 49 or 1 Event B flag Message routing Handling N Normal Route the Event Message to the specified Destination Address DA X Serial Port Route the Event Message to the unit s serial port only S Signal only Do not generate an Event Message The event s signal still follows the event s state U Undefined Delete the event s definition 1 Message ID flag Generate
272. tem Format Value Meaning 1 Action A flag P Send SMS to a defined Destination Point N Send SMS to a phone number C Cancels the SMS message before is sent 2 20 Destination BB integer For Destination Points 10 to 15 Point Phone Phone numbers can be up to 20 char Number acters 1 80 Text Message CCC varies Text message to be sent through the SMS Gateway The message has the following format que using the Q qualifier A Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 State A 0 4 0 Message Sent 1 Message pending to be sent Retry ing 2 Message was not sent due to a pa rameter error Message not sent Retry timeout 4 Message not sent User canceled Y For example to send a SMS message to Destination Point 10 use this message gt SXASGP10 Alert lt Or to send a SMS message to a phone number that is not defined in any Destination Point use the following message gt SXASGN3055551234 Return to base lt Only one SMS message can be sent at a time using this mechanism To cancel a pending SMS message that could not be sent for any reason use the following message gt SXASGC lt CY 272 6 71 XASI IMSI CONSULT 6 71 XASI IMSI Consult Qualifiers Q R Use this message to consult the unit s International Mobile Subscriber Identity IMSI The message has the following format AAA Chars Item Format Value Meaning IMSI A va
273. that Digital Communications Technologies shall not be responsible for any cus toms fees taxes or VAT that may be due Warranty Procedure To obtain service under this warranty please return the item s in question to the point of pur chase All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program Anyone returning goods to Digital Communications Technologies must first obtain an authorization number Digital Com munications Technologies will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained Conditions to Void Warranty This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use It does not cover e Damage incurred in shipping or handling e Damage caused by disaster such as fire flood wind earthquake or lightning e Damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Communications Technologies such as excessive voltage mechanical shock or water damage e Damage caused by unauthorized attachment alterations modifications or foreign objects e Damage caused by peripherals unless such peripherals were supplied by Digital Communica tions Technologies e Defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products e Damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed e Damage from improper maintenance e Damage arising out of any other abuse mishandling or improper application of the products Dig
274. the IP destination has been reestablished We will delete the 10 minute counter and set User Signal to true gt SED155VO A00 ACT SGCOOU ACT SSSU001 lt In this example we will use Counter 01 for the periodic reports We will use DCT 81 y 3 20 OBD Support 3 20 OBD SUPPORT a 60 minute timer for when the vehicle is not traveling We will use this time whether the GPRS IP destination is reachable or unreachable gt SED16SVO U05 ACT SGCO1TROOO6000060 lt Then we will set a timer for when the vehicle is traveling and the IP desti nation is reachable We will use a 5 minute timer for this example gt SED175VO VO5U00 amp ACT SGCO1TROOO0500060 lt And a event for when the vehicle is traveling but the IP destination is un reachable We will use a 20 minute timer to prevent that too many messages are sent using the satellite modem gt SED18SVO UO5U00 amp ACT SGCO1TROOO2000060 lt We need to delete the timer that determines the Stop Condition when the vehicle exceeds the speed limit We do this using a greater Event ID than the one used to determine the Start Condition to prevent that the Start Condition is not met since it depends on the C05 Signal gt SED195VO 505 ACT SGCO5U lt Define the events that will send the reports One for when the IP destina tion is unreachable that will only send the message to the satellite modem using the SC Originated Default Message protocol Notice that w
275. the inputs state changes To create input dependent events and to consult inputs state the Event Machine s IP signals are used These signals are true whenever the corresponding input is true For information on signals consult the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter The corresponding signals are Input Signal name Old signal name Input 1 IPI GOO Input 2 IP2 GO1 Input 3 IP3 G02 Input 4 IP4 G03 Ignition FOO FOO Inputs can be monitored with the SS TAIP message To consult the state of Input 3 Using the TAIP console send to the unit gt QSSIP3 lt For an active input i e input 3 at GND the unit returns gt RSSIP31 lt b A 52 a 3 4 Outputs Example 3 4 OUTPUTS and when the input is not active i e input 3 at any voltage or disconnected gt RSSIP30 lt The unit has 4 discrete outputs located on the main molex connector Given their 2A current capacity they can drive a wide range of loads The outputs are of Open Drain type with no pull up resistor Mean ing that the user has to provide a pull up resistor to any positive voltage 30V max to detect an inactive output by voltage Each output can drive a continuous current of 2A The electrical conditions are Logical State Electrical state Active OV Inactive Open or the pull up voltage max 30V Outputs may be driven locally or remotely using the TAIP console or the uni
276. the virtual odometer value exceeds the corre sponding threshold value See the XAVO message NOO N04 Acceleration For positive acceleration thresholds True when the vehicle s acceleration is larger than the corresponding threshold For negative acceleration thresholds True when the vehicle s acceleration is less than the corresponding threshold See the XAGN message DoT 296 Y ID Signal Description OEO OE4 Engine s RPM thresholds True when the egine s RPM detected by the OBD is higher than the corresponding RPM thresholds See the XADE mes sage OTO OT4 Throttle Position thresholds True when the throttle position percentage is higher than the corresponding throttle thresholds See the XAOT mes sage OFO OF4 Fuel Level percentage True when the remaining fuel in the vehicle drops below the corresponding fuel thresholds Percentage See the XAOF message OGO OG4 Fuel Gallons thresholds True when the remaining fuel in the vehicle drops below the corresponding fuel thresholds Gallons See the XAOG message ORO OR4 Fuel Rate thresholds True when the fuel consumption is higher than the corre sponding fuel rate thresholds Gallons per hour See the XAOR message OSO Status Communicating with Vehicle True when the OBD is communicating with Antares See the XAOS message OS1 Status Communication Checksum error True when
277. ther blinking or completely OFF In this state the LED shows the received signal strenght Refer to the Operation chapter for more information on LEDs and to the TAIP reference for the RP message The GPRS session status is shown by the On line LED The unit may only be registered on GPRS whenever it is GSM registered When the GPRS session is up and ready the On line LED is either blinking or solid Al though this LED being OFF indicates that the GPRS session is not ready it could mean that the unit is trying to establish the session and it could already be GPRS Attached A blinking On line LED indicates that GPRS registration is OK but shows that there are problems communicating with a remote IP server which is a non GPRS related problem 5 1 3 Creating a Destination Point DP Now that we have the unit working on the GSM GPRS network the unit is ready to send and receive communications from IP servers and phone num bers For our example we need to create a Destination Point DP which holds our remote server IP number or address and the serving port that it is using for listening to TCP connections or UDP datagrams As discussed on the Operation a Destination Point can work either with TCP or UDP protocols you can change this with the C flag of the Destination Point configuration see the XADP message For this example we will work with a remote server that listens for TCP connections If you do not already have an AVL server listeni
278. times the number you use to dial is not exactly the number that appears on a phone when a SMS is generated For example although the generating number is 123456 the cellular operator may tell the unit that the remote party is 44123456 In this case the long number including the sign has to be entered in the unit as Destination or it will fail on recognizing the valid sender SMS messages can be sent received even with no GPRS registration so you can have the unit working on a GSM only basis too SMS messages are great for solving the NAT problem mentioned on the previous sub section DCT 60 y 3 8 3 Voice GSM 3 9 TAIP console 3 9 TAIP CONSOLE Refer to the XAVC XAVE commands and voice signals for more infor mation Refer also to the Operation chapter and Examples chapter The Antares SB TAIP console allows commands and queries to be sent to the the unit by a user or software The TAIP console is avail able on all of the communication channels This means that the unit may be configured and or consulted locally over the serial port or remotely by means of IP communication GPRS or SMS interaction GSM The console is also used to show the unit s report messages generated by the Event Machine i e EV and ET TAIP messages The TAIP console is based on a question command and its answer which can be formed by multiple messages All of the messages ex changed on the console are TAIP Trimble Ascii Interf
279. ting that Destination Address 4 is the grouping of the single Des tination Point 00 5 1 5 Creating a time period criterion For this example we want the unit to send a report based on a time only criterion which will make the unit send a reporting message every x elapsed DCT 132 G 5 1 GETTING STARTED minutes There are several ways of doing this but one of the most common is to configure a Time And Distance signal with no Maximum Time Between Reports and no Distance Threshold parameters so it triggers a TD signal on a time only basis set by the Minimum Time Between Reports parameter Refer to the TD message for more information Let s use a reporting period of 5 minutes 300 seconds For no special reason let s choose TD signal 8 to do the job gt STD80300 lt This will make the unit activate signal TD8 every 5 minutes so we can create an event triggered by this signal which is going to generate the periodic report Note that in order to keep this example simple we are using a basic time only report but this approach is not advised on a real world scenario where a vehicle remains at rest most of the time and where having a time only criterion will generate a bunch of unnecessary messages It is recommended to use the three parameters of the Time And Distance definition to achieve a more intelligent report 5 1 6 Tiding a signal to an event With the signal TD8 generating a pulse every 5 minutes the only thing
280. tion about the actual Cell s e Cell ID Cell Identity Number between 0 and 65535 Represented in HEX 0000 FFFF e RSSI Received signal strength indicator Number between 0 and 63 To have the unit report Cl and RSSI on every EV message set the extended EV format A to contain CE gt SXAEFA CE lt Now every event which is defined with A as message type will add the CE information gt SED30NA0 JOO lt 17 See the EV message for detailed information DCT 124 lO user action method Cell ID change reporting 4 25 Sleep mode 4 25 SLEEP MODE Event 30 will be reported as gt REV301447147509 2578250 0802813901519512 CE 233428 ID EXAMPLE lt The reported message is explained in detail on the EV message description See the TAIP messages reference The second method for obtaining Cell ID reporting from the unit is to add a Cell ID query to an user action field on an Event Definition The previous Event 30 could have been defined as gt SED30NVO JOO ACT QXACE1 lt Thus generating a Cell ID query whenever JOO signal gets high turn by turn report After event 30 is reported the query generates a report with the answer to the Cell ID query gt RXACE1 208 00 1194 7ef1 27 739 9 2 0 lt Also a 6 neighbor query can be done gt SED35NVO U00 ACT QXACE2 lt For detailed information see the XACE message The Cell ID change signal F14 is included to generate a report whenever
281. tivated lt The underlined 05 indicates that the message we are defining is for event 05 5 2 5 Check the reported message The following text message should be arriving to the Phone Number 912345678 any time input 3 goes high Antares EXAMPLE Event 05 Input 3 has been activated If no user message is defined with the XATM message the following message is sent Antares EXAMPLE Event 05 If on the Destination Point we change the underlined 1 for a 0 we receive an EV message on the Phone Number instead of the user defined text something like gt REV050000001234 0000000 0000000000000001 ID EXAMPLE lt At the same time input 3 goes high an EV message is also sent to the remote AVL server Notice that we did not change the definition of the periodic report event event 37 so the periodic report is still being sent to the AVL server only b i 136 pu 5 2 6 Script 5 2 ADDING SMS REPORTING If no SMS is received on the Phone Number type destination consider the following e The unit can only send SMS messages when registered on GSM The Signal LED does not have to be solid ON e The cellular carrier has to provide SMS sending capabilities to the cellular line being used by the Antares SB e The phone number 912345678 may not be exactly the phone number that should be used for sending SMS messages A plus sign with country area code or similar may be required See the note on the Over
282. ue by 1 or DDDDD V When using the s qualifier Set the counter s value to DDDDD Use the Q qualifier to get the actual counter s value U Undefine counter The counter s definitions is deleted and the associated counter signal CAA is reset Set counter 03 on Timer mode When the counter s value reaches 5 min utes the C03 signal should get true The counter shall not recycle its value when reaching the 5 minutes or else we will end up with a periodic C03 signal To do this we define a timer with threshold value set to 300 seconds with no delta value gt SGCO3TCO0300 lt Notice the Recycle Flag set to C so the counter does not resets when reach ing the threshold Now 5 minutes after entering this command we will have the C03 signal transitioning from false to true Use a timer to generate a periodic counter signal having a period of 27 minutes To do this we define a timer that recycles whenever the count value reaches the threshold To show the use of the delta parameter we are not going to count seconds but minutes gt SGCO7TRO002700060 lt Now C07 signal gets high every 27 minutes getting low immediately af ter all event s are evaluated To create a distance counter that count x100 meters with no particular interest on any counter signal gt SGCO05DC0000100100 lt We set the threshold to 1 but it could have been set to any value as we DCT 180 Y Example 4 6 9 GC COUNTER
283. uisition and tracking Status OA status Code 00 Doing position fixes 01 Don t have GPS time yet 02 Not used 03 PDOP is too high 08 No usable satellites 09 Only 1 usable satellite OA Only 2 usable satellites OB Only 3 usable satellites BB Stationary Mode OC Chosen satellite is unusable 1 Status B Hex characters 0 F Value Codes Nibble 1 0 No problems reported 2 Antenna feedline open fault 6 Antenna feedline short fault 1 Status C Hex characters 0 F Value Codes Nibble 2 O No problems reported 1 Battery back up failed RAM not available at power up see note be low 2 Machine DD Hex characters 00 Internal GPS Machine ID ID FF 1 Status E Hex characters 0 F Not used Codes Nibble 3 1 Status F Hex characters 0 F Value Codes Nibble 4 O No problems reported 2 RTC not available at power up see note below 8 Stored almanac not complete and current A RTC not available stored almanac not complete and current 2 Not used GG Hex value Not used The Note After the status is detected this bit remains set until the receiver is reset Dey 202 6 24 TM TIME AND DATE 6 24 TM Time and Date Qualifiers Q R This message provides information about the unit s Time and Date as provided by the GPS service The message has the following format AABBCCDDDEEFFGGGGHHIJJKLLLL
284. um registered speed is 41MPH Now to know where the maximum breaking occurred the GPS informa tion for the maximum negative acceleration is consulted gt QXAITI lt The unit responds something like gt RXAIT1 10EV001447147233 2578230 0802813901519512 ID EXAMPLE lt Showing the max negative acceleration of 10 and adding the underlined part which is an event 00 EV message with all of the GPS information at the moment the maximum breaking occurred To clear the maximum accelerations and maximum speed the following DCT 118 y O 4 17 USING ACCELERATION SIGNALS command is sent gt SXAITC lt For detailed information consult the XAIT message in the TAIP chapter Acceleration limits can be set to trigger events whenever the acceleration exceeds given positive or negative thresholds See the next section 4 17 Using Acceleration signals Warning See the previous section for an introduction on how acceleration is calcu lated and used Positive and negative acceleration thresholds can be set to trigger an event and also to report a GPS Back Log to have a 1 second follow up of the ve hicle previous to a large acceleration condition To do so the Acceleration Signals Nxx are used Up to 5 thresholds can be set with the XAGN message For example to set a threshold on 13Miles h s and another threshold at 18Miles h s send to the unit gt SXAGNO01 13 lt gt SXAGNO11 18 lt Now to have the
285. unit s serial port can be used to configure controll the unit and 1t may also be used to transffer any byte like messages to and from remote Destinations One application for this is attaching an MDT4 device Other example includes attaching a satellital modem to be used when no GSM GPRS signal is detected by the Antares SB Communication buffer TM r a A Antares SB will start saving event s reports and incoming serial port data whenever one or more Destinations are unreachable Automatic outputs control DNS lookup The outputs can be driven by commands or they may be driven au tomatically by the unit whenever a pre configured situation occurs IP type Destinations can be defined with a numeric IP address or with a host name Antares SB will use the carrier s DNS servers to resolve names This feature is very useful when the IP host s resides on an IP changing environment Turn by turn report Driving metrics By tracking the vehicle s heading change a turn by turn report can be achieved This leads to detailed tracking of a vehicle s route and also to a reduction of unnecessary reports on long straight roads and highways The vehicle s instant acceleration can be obtained at any time and also the maximum acceleration and maximum speed values with their respective GPS location can be saved and reported so that good and bad drivers can be more easily detected The maximum nega tive acceleration value
286. unit send event 05 whenever the positive threshold is ex ceeded large gas pedal usage and event 23 whenever the negative threshold is exceeded large breaking condition or crash situation use gt SEDO5XVO NO0 lt gt SED23XV0 NO1 lt Note that for positive acceleration thresholds Acceleration Sig nals are TRUE when the vehicle s acceleration is larger than the threshold For negative acceleration thresholds Acceleration Sig nals are TRUE when the vehicle s acceleration is less than the threshold See the XAGN message for detailed information Now to have the unit report a GPS back of the previous 60 seconds before a large breaking or crash condition use the XAKL message in the event s user action field gt SED24XV0 NO1 ACT QXAKL lt DCT 119 e Ul 4 18 Voice calls Note 4 18 VOICE CALLS This will make the unit send the last 60 GPS messages Antares SB has received from its GPS module The last 15 seconds can be retrieved instead of 60 just change QXAKL to QXAKLOO15 See the XAKL message and the GPS Back Log section for more information To make the Antares SB generate terminate a voice call refer to the XAVC and XAVE messages To answer voice calls If no voice call is being held the unit can answer incoming calls as long as the remote party number is registered on any Phone number type Desti nation and the Destination is authorized to receive phone calls If
287. uo 3su J04 euo 07 uos1aA d13H 01 05 soLiaddre Jo z o uoa Sun jo urs ayew Japeojumog div Sum vay enuey suan gs sasezuy ayy 03 Jaja UOIJEWIOJUL aJow 404 TUG uosa 2 2 Mus 0 sandde apin siy woy y2s Wo ep Eipepyoddns 12 1509 ewo poddns jer1UYy 38 104 WOY Yyr2s WO Tey p MMM wouy jenuew spun ay pue apino 31835 YIIND sty Jas UeD noy 319070NH33 1 SNOILVJIN NWWOD TVLIDIG Aq painy nuew si gs ssuezuy NOLLVWHOSNI BuLjooysayq nosy pue UOLJEWOJUL aow JO enuey 5 1361 ayy 0 apay GO St apo podas ay ONO 9 Pa38U10 st g Indu vaya oge Sultaue aq pinoys podas yuasa Uy gt ZE SL apo uodas ay 1213341 SAPNULW G e UO Janas 7 AY ay 0 Su ue aq pioys podas uasa Ue NO PIOS St pa 3NIINO 24741 9 Buljooysayqnol 104 apin 5 1361 341 0 Jajau saynuiw G 1342 NO POs 385 Jou s20P pa INIT NO 3444 e YIAYIS JAV AHL ONINDSHD LZ PUEBLOS gt yS lt 34 YUM q Jaye pun ay 33534 pue 3 pue e sda s aoui Asayeq dn y q Ul ING e YY SUDJOM USYA 310N yun ay 0 ssauJey Jamod ay pauuon gt H39 4 19 un unSy Sy UO PSJE31PUL Ple WIS ay asu q sauJey Jamod suun BY JRSULOBIg E GuvD WIS LYISNI 9 spuosss q uey 53 UL PS UIM St 301155 papes SulyJa0 ay ueaddesip 0 S0 e1p s es y Suipues 341 JO PIA SHEJ saud SULJLIM ayy 9 uoynq usdo ay 4242 pue ay du25 Hwy payeur ay 98185 paiduoid uaym q Tay Woy sauejue 0 uonenSyuon 1114 pass nuaw sauejuy
288. verted into a new report message just by adding the message to the DCT 69 y 3 12 Reports buffer Note 3 12 REPORTS BUFFER user action field of an event definition For more information and examples see the Event Machine section on the Configuration chapter The Antares SB reserves a memory space to save reports whenever the remote Destination is not available The buffering process for a Destination takes place on any of the following situations e For IP type destinations 1 The GPRS session is down 2 The GPRS session is up but the unit is on an Over The Air Firmware Upgrade process 3 When using TCP The GPRS session is up but the TCP con nection with the IP host is closed and cannot be established or the host is unreachable 4 When using UDP The GPRS session is up but the IP host is not acknowledging UDP reports e For Telephone Numbers destinations 1 The unit is not registered on the GSM network 2 There is no Telephone Number defined on the report s Destina tion e The serial port destination is never buffered The unit has an event buffering capacity of 1137 events Events are buffered and transmitted on an individual manner for each Destination meaning that an unreachable destination may have many pending events while other destinations have their buffer empty with no interference between the two destinations The total buffer capacity whatsoever is shared among all des
289. work validation for the UDP Server port is optional as the validation is also done by looking for a match on the IP type UDP Destinations defined as IP numbers When an UDP Network is set the validation for UDP queries received on the UDP Server port starts with it If a match is found a response is sent to the peer If no UDP Network match is found or if an UDP Network is not defined a search for a match is done on the IP type UDP set Destinations if a match is found a response is generated to the UDP destination Finally if no match is found the query is silently discarded The UDP Network is defined by a network s IP and a mask The network s IP is any IP address that defines the common IP addresses values among the members of the UDP Network The mask is defined as the number of ones from left to right which define the host address portion to validate on a peer s IP address The message has the following format ATAA AAA AAA AAAJ B B Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1st number AAA 000 255 First number of the IP number Use U to undefine the UDP Network Default or enter any IP address that defines the UDP network 2nd number BBB 000 255 Second number of the IP number 3rd number CCC 000 255 Third number of the IP number 4th number DDD 000 255 Fourth number of the IP number N w w w Network s mask EE 0 32 Number of set bits from left to right that define th
290. x The AVL server will be able to send and consult the state of Stop Messages The Stop Messages give the Garmin device coordinates of a destination which it can use to trace a route that the driver can follow Antares SB will also send unsolicited status messages when an action is performed on the Stop Message or when the destination is reached 3 18 1 Setting up Antares SB Antares SB communicates with the Garmin device via its serial port at 9600 bps 8nl Antares SB needs to be set in the Garmin communica tion mode using the XAGME message In this mode the Antares SB TAIP console will be disabled and it will not accept any TAIP configuration mes sages via the serial port The TAIP configuration messages can still be sent over the air to Antares SB To exit the Garmin mode via the serial port a special escaping message has to be sent The escaping message is EXIT_COMMDATA and must be sent as a single packet using a com munication software like Hyperterminal It is also possible to disable the Garmin mode over the air with the XAGMD TAIP message The Garmin mode and the MDT mode MT are mutually exclusive The Antares SB will return Error 91 if the MT message is used to enable the MDT OBD or Orbcomm mode while the Garmin mode is enabled and viceversa DCT 72 G 3 18 GARMIN DEVICES SUPPPORT The Garmin device must have the Fleet Management Protocol version 1 0 or later to be compatible with the Antares SB
291. ximum switching voltage 30V e Maximum repetition rate 1 sec Logical Electrical state Logical State Electrical state Active high Inactive low OV Open or the pull up voltage max 30V 1 5 6 Analog To Digital Converter 1 5 7 Audio e Voltage range 0 V to 32 V e Input impedance 22 Kohms e Resolution 10 bits e Sampling rate 3s sec averaged on a 10 seconds interval e Supports non balanced mic speaker connection 34 Dey 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS 1 5 8 GSM GPRS module 2 5mm Stereo audio jack Speaker impedance 32ohms Microphone Electret type Frequencies 850 1900 or 900 1800 Mhz Full duplex communication Automatic start up Antenna Impedance 50 Ohms SIM Card 3 Volts SIM Card PIN Programmed by user one time automatically in troduced onward PIN saved on Non Volatile memory Receiver parameters GSM850 Reference Sensitivity 104 dBm Static and TUHigh E GSM900 Reference Sensitivity 104 dBm Static and TUHigh DCS1800 Reference Sensitivity 102 dBm Static and TUHigh PCS1900 Reference Sensitivity 102 dBm Static and TUHigh Selectivity 200 kHz gt 9 dBc Selectivity 400 kHz gt 41 dBc Linear dynamic range 63 dB Co channel rejection gt 9 dBc Transmitter parameters Maximum output power EGSM and GSM850 33 dBm 2dB at ambient temperature Maximum output power GSM18
292. xt one as we would like the Phone Number to have TAIP console and voice access 5 2 2 Create a new Destination Address For now we only have DA 4 that associates only DP 00 We need to create another DA that includes our AVL server DP 00 and the recently created Phone Number DP 10 For no particular reason we choose DA 5 to do the job DCT gt SDA5 P00 P10 lt 135 Y 5 2 ADDING SMS REPORTING Now Destination Address 5 holds Destination Points 00 and 10 We can point any event to DA 5 making any report generated by the event to be routed to our AVL server an to the Telephone Number 912345678 at the same time 5 2 3 Change the Input report event definition Our previously input report event was defined on event 05 We are going to use the same definition but as you will notice we are going to change on the event s routing options the selected DA from 4 to 5 gt SEDO5NV5 IP3 lt Now any time input 3 goes high IP3 an event report is going to be generated to both the AVL server and the Phone Number 912345678 5 2 4 Create a SMS custom message The only thing left to do is create a user defined text to be sent to the Phone Number type destination whenever event 03 occurs For this we use the XATM message which allows to create up to 50 user messages one for each event Refer to the XATM message on the TAIP reference for more in formation Let s use the text Input 3 has been activated gt SXATMO5Input 3 has been ac
293. y sent to the serial port Example Reporting an extended E V message 6 5 ED EVENT DEFINITION To define event 05 to send an EV Event Message every 3 minutes 1 Use the TD message to configure a Time amp Distance signal to trigger every 3 minutes gt STD70180 lt 2 Define the event with signal TD7 as trigger gt SEDOSNVO TD7 lt Note that DAO Destination Address 0 must be defined so that the Event Message can be routed to any IP address es and or SMS s receiver s If the message were not to be routed the Event Definition message should be gt SEDO5SVO TD7 lt The only purpose of this event is to drive the E05 signal true or false ac cording to the event s trigger TD7 in order to trigger any other event s that include E05 as part of its trigger definition Send an Event Message when an input gets active gt SED31NVO IP3 lt This definition will make the unit send an EV Event Message with code 31 every time the input 3 becomes true Have the unit initiate a time counter set an user signal true and reset a distance counter whenever the vehicle s ignition goes high gt SED35SV0O FOO ACT SGCO5TC ACT SSSU041 ACT SGCO7TU lt Have the unit define the same actions in the previous example but this time the actions will only be reported to the serial port gt SED35SV0O FOO XCT SGCO5TC XCT SSSU041 XCT SGCO7TU lt Have the unit send an extended EV report that includes the
294. y suspended For example Distancer 2 S 1200 x 10m If no S is shown it means the counter is running The counter type Counter indicates a user defined counter See the GC message for more information 216 z O 6 33 XACT Communication Test Qualifiers S R 6 33 XACT COMMUNICATION TEST Use this message to generate an event code to a Destination Address DA This message is used to test the communication with a given destination s without requiring for an specific event to occur It is also a method for testing a DA definition and testing the remote host identification process of an EV message The message has the following format ABB Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 Destination A 0 9 Destination Address to which gener Address ate the fake event 2 event code BB 00 49 Event code to report 217 zz G 6 34 XADM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE 6 34 XADM Diagnostic Message Qualifiers Q R Use this message to query unit s status The message has the following formats For diagnostic level 0 ABBCCDEFFGHIIJKLMMNN Chars Item Format Value Meaning 1 level A Diagnostic level 0 First level 2 FW family BB 05 Firmware family Always return 05 2 FW version CC Firmware version 1 SIM state D 0 9 SIM card state O No PIN attempts left 3 PIN error 6 SIM ready T No PIN set 9 Starting
295. you run the AVL server DCT 133 A O 5 1 GETTING STARTED Some examples of such tools can be found at e TCP client and listener TCP Test Tool from www simplecomtools com e UDP client and listener UDP Test Tool from www simplecomtools com e Network sniffer Wireshark from http www wireshark org 5 1 8 Adding an Input report 5 1 9 Script Now we will like to create an Input report to the AVL server having the event code 05 whenever the Input 3 goes high This is a simple event that depends on a single signal transition signal IP3 which is the same as signal G03 gt SEDO5NV4 IP3 lt Now our unit is generating a 5 minutes periodic report and also a special report whenever the Input 3 goes high This example can be resumed with the following script Antares SB script Getting Started example Delete any previous configuration gt SRT CONFIG lt gt SXADP U lt Unit s ID gt SIDEXAMPLE lt configuring the SIM s PIN gt SRFI1234 lt configuring the APN gt SRFAinternet carrier name com lt The remote AVL server address and port gt SXADPO000avl server com 2145 lt HA Destination Address holding the 2 G signals are maintained for backward compatibility signals is preferred 3 An input high is an input at GND or 0 volts The use of IP and XP 134 CT 5 2 ADDING SMS REPORTING server destination gt SDA4 POO lt Time only Time And D

Antares SB-GSM User`s Manual [FW5.30]

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents